SPECIFICATION
OF
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP TO BE USED IN CONSTRUCTION OF
PROPOSED RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT AT
38 AROONA ROAD, CAULFIELD NORTH VICTORIA FOR
DANNY SEGMAN
FEBRUARY 2013
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD S.110, 181 ST KILDA ROAD ST KILDA VICTORIA 3182 TEL 03 9534 2254 FAX 9534 8847
[email protected]
1
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
INDEX A1 B BB C D DD E FF G GG H J K KK L M MM MMM N P R S X YY
GENERAL CONDITIONS DEMOLITION EXCAVATION SITEWORKS CONCRETE PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURAL STEELWORK BLOCKLAYER TILING AND FLOORING CARPET ROOFER TANKING AND WATERPROOFING PLASTERER THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION METALWORKER CARPENTER AND JOINER DOORS JOINERY FITMENTS ELECTRICAL PLUMBER PAINTER GLAZIER SEALANTS AND CAULKING CLEANING
Appendices: PC SCHEDULE AND FIXTURES PC SCHEDULE PC DOORHARDWARE SCHEDULE ENERGY RATING REQUIREMENTS AND ENERGY RATING REPORT. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS CONTENTS
A.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 3 A.1.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 3 A.1.2 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT REQUIREMENTS ........................... 3 A.1.3 BY-LAWS, REGULATIONS, CERTIFICATES AND AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS................................................................ 3 A.1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY .................................................. 4 A.1.5 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY ........................................................... 4 A.1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 4 A.1.7 MATERIAL AND LABOUR ................................................................... 5 A.1.8 PROTECTION...................................................................................... 5 A.1.9 SUPERINTENDENCE AND LABOUR ................................................. 5 A.1.10 ATTENDANCE ..................................................................................... 6 A.1.11 SCAFFOLDING.................................................................................... 6 A.1.12 DEFECTIVE LABOURS AND MATERIALS ......................................... 6 A.1.13 LIGHTING, POWER, GAS AND FIRE SERVICE ................................. 6 A.1.14 WATER ................................................................................................ 6 A.1.15 AWARDS AND ALLOWANCES ........................................................... 6 A.1.16 RISKS AND DAMAGE ......................................................................... 6 A.1.17 INJUNCTIONS ..................................................................................... 7 A.1.18 SITE NOISE CONTROL ...................................................................... 7 A.1.19 DUST CONTROL ................................................................................. 7 A.1.20 SITE CONTROL................................................................................... 7 A.1.21 HOARDINGS AND CROSSOVERS ..................................................... 7 A.1.22 CONTRACTORS' QUALITY CONTROL .............................................. 7 A.1.23 SECURITY ........................................................................................... 7 A.1.24 TIDINESS OF THE WORKS ................................................................ 8 A.1.25 SAFETY ............................................................................................... 8 A.1.26 USE OF PUBLIC ROADS .................................................................... 8 A.1.27 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES, PAVEMENT, ROADS AND ADJACENT PROPERTIES ............................................ 9 A.1.28 GENERAL WATERPROOFING ........................................................... 9 A.1.29 EXISTING SERVICES ......................................................................... 9 A.1.30 TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION ..................................................... 9 A.1.31 FIRST AID .......................................................................................... 10 A.1.32 HEARING PROTECTION .................................................................. 10 A.1.33 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS ..................................................... 10 A.1.34 CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS ..................................................... 10 A.1.35 CARE AND PROTECTION ................................................................ 10 A.1.36 SHOP DRAWINGS ............................................................................ 11 A.1.37 SHOP DRAWING REVIEW................................................................ 11 A.1.38 MEETINGS ........................................................................................ 11 A.1.39 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES ................................................. 12 A.1.40 SETTING OUT ................................................................................... 12 A.1.41 VERIFICATION OF BASE- STRUCTURE ......................................... 12 A.1.42 DAILY DIARY ..................................................................................... 13 A.1.43 ASBESTOS, DANGEROUS AND TOXIC SUBSTANCES FOUND DURING WORK: .................................................................. 13
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.44 A.1.45 A.1.46 A.1.47 A.1.48 A.1.49 A.1.50 A.1.51 A.1.52 A.1.53 A.1.54 A.1.55 A.1.56 A.1.57 A.1.58 A.1.59 A.1.60 A.1.61 A.1.62 A.1.63 A.1.64 A.1.65 A.1.66 A.1.67 A.1.68
HOARDINGS AND BARRICADES ..................................................... 13 CONSTRUCTION LOADS ................................................................. 13 PAY ALL FEES .................................................................................. 13 FENCING ........................................................................................... 13 SIGNBOARD...................................................................................... 14 SITE ALLOWANCES AND INDUSTRIAL RELATION ........................ 14 PROJECT DOCUMENTS .................................................................. 14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .......................................... 14 CLASSIFIED DOCUMENTS .............................................................. 14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .................... 14 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................... 15 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY ............................................. 15 WELDING, CUTTING OR GRINDING IN SITU.................................. 15 SEPARATE CONTRACTS ................................................................. 15 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................. 15 PUBLICITY......................................................................................... 15 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION AND PROGRAMMING .............. 15 MEASURMENT OF WORK................................................................ 16 SAMPLES FOR TESTING ................................................................. 16 SAMPLES – GENERALLY ................................................................. 16 INSPECTIONS ................................................................................... 16 TESTINg ............................................................................................ 16 TESTING LABORATORY: ................................................................. 17 PROTECTION.................................................................................... 17 USE OF PROPRIETARY NAMES ..................................................... 17
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.1.1
GENERALLY
The extent of Works under this Contract shall be: CONSTRUCTION OF MIXED USE DEVELOPMENT BUILDING COMPLETE WITH ALL SERVICES AND FINISHES The laneway to the rear of the site running at right angles to the rear boundary is to be constructed by the Contractor to Council's satisfaction. In this respect, the existing bluestones are to be re-Iaid/re-set at an appropriate grade. The level of quality of the completed work is high and should represent excellent workmanship by industrial standards. Provide all labour, materials, plant, including any obvious work not shown on drawings or specified and everything necessary for the proper and complete execution of the Works. Be responsible for the co-ordination, execution and completion of the Contract. Be responsible for confirming the location of site boundaries and any easements through the services of a registered Land Surveyor. SPECIAL TP CONDITIONS During the constructions of the buildings and works allowed by this permit, the roads, lanes and streets adjacent to the subject land must be kept free of parked or standing vehicles or any other obstructions, including building materials, equipment etc so as to maintain free vehicular passage to abutting benefiting properties at all times, unless with the written consent of the Responsible Authority. Prior to the issue of a certificate of occupancy for the dwellings, a certified survey plan showing finished floor levels (as constructed) reduced to Australian Height Datum, must be submitted to Melbourne Water to demonstrate that the floor levels have been constructed in accordance with Melbourne Water’s requirements.
A.1.2
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Re-use or recycle at least 80% of construction waste; Provide double glazed windows where required; Timber to be from sustainable sources (recycled, Forest Stewardship Council certified}. Painted surfaces to be finished with low VOC paints; Provide low -VOC carpet, where specified Carpet. Composite wood products to be low emission formaldehyde or approved substitute.
A.1.3
BY-LAWS, REGULATIONS, CERTIFICATES AND AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS
All work shall be executed in accordance with all Legal Enactment, Laws and Regulations governing such work, Occupational Health & Safety Act 2005 and including, where specified, Australian Standards (AS).
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS Arrange for the testing by inspectors licensed in the State of Victoria any work requiring such tests and shall pay all fees in connection with these tests, including the first year’s fee for such certificates that require annual renewal. Where required by regulations, mount certificates in glass-fronted frames, displayed on the premises. Comply with the Victorian Building Industry Agreements.
A.1.4
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor must hold Building Practitioner’s Registration with the Builders Control Commission as required to perform the required building works. Be solely responsible for the execution and completion of the Contract including all sub-contracted work which he shall co-ordinate so that the Works proceed without delay. He shall ensure that, in addition to items of work specifically mentioned in the relevant sections, each trade shall assist, leave holes for, cut away for, do chasing and drilling for, make good after, and arrange work sequence with every other, in such a manner as to promote the best interests of the work.
A.1.5
CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY
The Contractor warrants that the works when completed and every part thereof and all materials, articles and goods used or incorporated therein or supplied by the Contractor, whether through a sub-Contractor or supplier or not, and in performance or purported performance of the Agreement, whether purchased under any patent or trade name or otherwise, shall comply with the quality, quantity, number, nature, description and condition as required by the agreement. Ensure that the completed building is fully waterproofed and that all works by the Contractor are carried out to the best construction industry standards.
A.1.6
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The documents, which constitute the Contract, are mutually explanatory and anything contained in one but not in the other shall be equally binding as if contained in all. Except on details, dimensions are given to the structural faces of masonry, stud framing and concrete faces. Dimensions figured on drawings take precedence over scaled dimensions. Do not scale Drawings, which are clearly diagrammatic, and/or marked ‘not to scale’ or NTS. Larger scale drawings shall take precedence over smaller scale drawings. Dimensioned drawings shall take precedence over non-Dimensioned drawings. Where repetitive features are not fully drawn, they shall be similar to those, which are fully drawn. The drawings show the existing positions of plant and equipment and the general layout of services. Their actual position in relation to each other and to the surrounding work shall be verified on site. All measurements necessary to achieve a neat and functional layout shall be taken on the site by the Contractor who shall ensure that clearances for operation and maintenance are adequate and not in any case less than those indicated on the drawings Supply of minor items necessary to complete the works is the Contractor’s responsibility. THE PURPOSE OF THE SPECIFICATION IS TO AMPLIFY THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE DRAWINGS. IT IS NOT TO DESCRIBE OF EMPHASIS ANY ASPECTS OF THE WORK TO BE DONE OR MATERIALS TO BE USED WHICH ARE SUITABLY OR ADEQUATILY SHOWN AND/OR DESCRIBED ON THE DRAWINGS.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.7
MATERIAL AND LABOUR
All products, materials and items specified shall be supplied, installed, fixed or used in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions notwithstanding anything which may be specified in this specification or shown on the Contract drawings except where the specification or other Contract documents indicate that a higher standard is required in which case the higher standard shall prevail. Obtain from suppliers and manufacturers their latest and current instructions in writing for the installation, fixing and use of their respective materials and items and follow these said requirements except where higher standards are indicated in the Contract documents. Provide all materials, labour, plant, equipment and incidentals necessary for the execution of every part of the work. Perform all work in the manner specified or, if not specified, according to the best practice. Use or install all materials, equipment and fittings strictly in accordance with the manufacturer or suppliers' instructions unless otherwise specified. Where a material or manufacturer is named in this Specification, the Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his tender for the named material or manufacturer irrespective of the phrase "or other approved" which may follow. With exceptions as specified or indicated on the drawings, apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment in accordance with manufacturers' current printed recommendations. Be responsible for ordering all materials and equipment in a timely manner. Failure to do so will not constitute grounds for an extension of time or for the substitution of materials or equipment.
A.1.8
PROTECTION
Ensure that safety and freedom from injury, damage or interference of all the adjacent public or private lands, properties, ways, services and all other adjacent real or personal property whatsoever is provided. Carry out and provide shoring or other forms of support, shielding, fencing and other protective and precautionary measures as may be necessary for any of the purposes aforesaid. Provide adequate warning notices and physical protection to installations that may prove dangerous to persons either during construction or after completion.
A.1.9
SUPERINTENDENCE AND LABOUR
Coordinate all Works and supplies in this Contract. Before the work is put in hand, obtain the position of and be responsible for chases, holes, and other provisions required for construction work. Support and protect materials, fittings and finishes from damage, from weather or other causes and make good damage including Sub-Contractors materials and work. Carry out the Works in a safe manner, and in such a manner as will cause the minimum dust, disturbance, noise, obstruction, discomfort and interference to adjoining owners and public. Comply with all reasonable requests to reduce or cease any interference, unsafe practices, noise and the like. Site shall conform to the requirements of Authorities relating to the safety of persons on or about the site. Ensure that all equipment used in connection with the Works conforms to the requirements of any Authority and be adequately strong and safe for use; Immediately discontinue any practice or remove any equipment that becomes or is likely to become dangerous or unsafe;
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS Remove from the works promptly any of his employees or representatives who by their conduct could create danger to themselves or others. Provide and arrange for all necessary labour to complete the Works in accordance with the Works Program. No extension of time will be considered due to the failure to obtain sufficient labour. Report the discovery of asbestos and await further instruction before proceeding with further work.
A.1.10
ATTENDANCE
Each trade shall attend other trades as required and make good thereafter. Coordinate the activities of trades to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Allow for building in equipment, fittings and fastenings as are required and for cutting openings and chases and making good thereafter for all pipes, conduits and fittings that may be installed. Attend upon, cut away and make good after all trades, when and where directed.
A.1.11
SCAFFOLDING
Be responsible for supply, erection and striking of all scaffolding required for the erection and completion of the Works. All scaffolding necessary for the performance of the contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of all relevant Authorities, and all related legislation and regulations related to construction safety. Pay all fees with respect to such scaffolding prescribed by these acts or regulations. Bind all SubContractors to comply with the requirements of this clause.
A.1.12
DEFECTIVE LABOURS AND MATERIALS
Rectify and remove from the Works as and where directed all defective work and/or materials.
A.1.13
LIGHTING, POWER, GAS AND FIRE SERVICE
Install wiring and meters, pay all charges to date of Practical Completion of each portion of the Works as it is handed over. Provide adequate light to allow for free movement in all parts of the Works. Provide Fire Service including Fire Extinguishers (maintain fully charged, and accessible for the care and safety of the Works), etc.
A.1.14
WATER
Provide necessary water for the Works inclusive with meters, plumbing, and storage, to the positions required. Pay all charges.
A.1.15
AWARDS AND ALLOWANCES
Observe all awards and pay all claims in respect of rates of pay and allowances and other requirements relating to the employment of labour including payroll tax and other applicable tax applicable.
A.1.16
RISKS AND DAMAGE
Accept and provide for all risks within the scope of his legal liability and make good all losses, damage or claims and/or costs and expenses, including legal costs and expenses, arising during or out of these works. Be responsible for the fire precautions taken during construction. Any damage to completed work by subsequent trades must be progressively made good. The responsibility for inspection and rectification rests with the Contractor.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.17
INJUNCTIONS
The Contract includes complying with any injunction served by an Authority and for the interruption of work due to such injunction.
A.1.18
SITE NOISE CONTROL
Comply with current AS Codes to Noise Control on Construction, Maintenance and Demolition Sites and all other statutory requirements relating to control of noise levels on site. All compressors and other stationary engines shall be of the silenced type and silenced jackhammers shall be used where such breaking equipment is necessary. Operation of equipment shall be closely supervised by the Contractor to ensure that silencers are always in place. Use of compressors and jackhammers shall be limited to agreed hours.
A.1.19
DUST CONTROL
During the currency of this Contract, and particularly while earthworks are in progress and during periods of dry windy weather, the affected areas of the site shall be sprayed with water as often as necessary to prevent dust from rising.
A.1.20
SITE CONTROL
Be responsible for all activities on the site including providing access for authorised persons and restricting access by unauthorised persons. Waste building materials and flammable liquids shall not be stored in the building. Disposal of waste shall be done on a regular basis and in accordance with Responsible Authority's requirements. All proper precautions shall be taken to keep all poisons and other injurious substances in places secured against access by unauthorised persons.
A.1.21
HOARDINGS AND CROSSOVERS
Provide hoardings and barriers around building works and excavations for the protection of public and property. All hoarding, notices and barriers shall have clear signwriting and shall be brightly lit during night-time. Provide protection for footpaths, kerbs, roads and gutters from damage. Make good all damage caused to existing crossing, footpaths, kerbs, roads and gutters, etc., as a result of building operations.
A.1.22
CONTRACTORS' QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged or defective items. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing the work properly as it is installed, true to line and level, and within recognised industry tolerances unless otherwise indicated. Allow for expansion and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organised for best possible visual effect. Re-check measurements and dimensions of the work as an integral step in starting each installation.
A.1.23
SECURITY
Take all proper and adequate precautions to prevent access by unauthorised persons to the Site and the Works to prevent all thefts and vandalism. Lock up and barricade the Site and the Works. Replace and make good any loss and/or damage from theft, trespass and/or vandalism occurring to the Works.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.24
TIDINESS OF THE WORKS
Ensure that the Site and all sections of the Works are kept tidy at all times. Remove and deposit rubbish and waste material at frequent intervals and at any time required.
A.1.25
SAFETY
Take every precaution to ensure the safety and protection at all times of all persons on or about the Site, including all workmen and SubContractors' workmen and other employed on the Works, and to this end shall provide and maintain all facilities both necessary and proper to comply with the safety rules and regulations of any Body or Authority having jurisdiction in relation thereto; Comply with and observe the provisions and recommendations of the Building Industry Agreement relative to Safety, Safety helmets and First Aid; Comply with and observe the recommendations of the WorkCover and National Safety Council of Australia in relation to the safety and protection of workmen; Ensure that all hoists, tackle, gear, scaffolding, ladders, winching arrangements, mechanical and other equipment used in connection with the Works, shall not only conform to the requirements of any statutory regulation thereto, but also to prudent practice; Ensure that no excessive loads are placed on the structure, temporary or finished works. Take all steps to ensure that safety facilities are provided and maintained and all such precautions are taken and rules observed by all others including the SubContractors; Require all persons on the Site during the course of the Contract to wear approved safety helmets at all times. The Contractor shall supply and issue such helmets for his personnel, Consultants, visitors and representatives of the Owner with distinguishing marks or colours where necessary. Provide and display in prominent positions, warning signs of dangerous activities with all regulations appertaining. Total responsibility for safety on the Site lies with the Contractor and he is in turn responsible for ensuring that the SubContractors are equally aware of and equally bound by the provisions of this clause. Accidents: Promptly record the occurrence of the following: 1. Accidents involving death or personal injury. 2. Accidents involving loss of time. 3. Incidents with accident potential such equipment failure, slides and cave-ins. Accident reports: Submit reports of accidents. Purpose of submission: Information only. Asbestos: Do not use products containing asbestos.
A.1.26
USE OF PUBLIC ROADS
The Contractor shall maintain all roadways free of any other material that falls from his plant. All such materials dropped into public roads shall be promptly removed and the road cleaned to the satisfaction of the Council or other Authority without additional charge. All vehicles and containers used by the Contractor for the transport of materials shall be so constructed as to prevent spillage. In the event of any such vehicle being leaky or otherwise unsuitable it shall be withdrawn from the work immediately. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.27
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES, PAVEMENT, ROADS AND ADJACENT PROPERTIES
Protect and maintain or remove and replace or arrange for the removal and replacement of all pavement items including standards, traffic signals, light poles, parking lines, pavement covers and the like, as required by the various authorities. Form and maintain temporary access roads, footpaths, gangways, etc., as required and keep pavement clear for public use at all times. Clear away on completion and make good to approval.
A.1.28
GENERAL WATERPROOFING
Assume full responsibility for the general watertightness of the Works.
A.1.29
EXISTING SERVICES
Disconnect, remove, divert, extend, seal, plug off any services found on the Site not in use or required to be made good to the approval of the appropriate Authorities. Be responsible for ascertaining the positions of any power cables, drains, water pipes, gas pipes and any other services which may or may not be shown on the drawings.
A.1.30
TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION
Provide and maintain in a clean condition all sheds and temporary accommodations required for the use of employees and shall include for the following: STORAGE OF MATERIALS Provide waterproof sheds for storage of cement, timber, joinery, etc. Fit with racks and platforms as necessary. FOREMAN'S OFFICE Provide and maintain an office for the Foreman with bench and storage area for drawings and adequate lighting. Provide a minimum of two lines with telephones and a separate facsimile machine on its own dedicated telephone line. The Contractor is to pay all rentals and costs. SITE OFFICE Provide a weathertight site office and 1. Pay charges for services. 2. Maintain in good order and clean condition, with secure access, for duration of the Work. 3. Obtain permission for removal; and 4. Remove on completion. SANITARY ACCOMMODATION Provide on site suitable temporary enclosures and conveniences for the use of workers, maintaining same in a clean and sanitary condition in accordance with the requirements of Local Authorities, and on completion of the project, remove the enclosures and conveniences from the site, treating any fouled ground and leaving the whole in a hygienic condition. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING Safety: Make available safety helmets and safety vests for the use of visitors.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 10 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Standard : To AS 1801 2. Standards Mark: Required. 3. Number of helmets: 10 PERSONAL PROTECTION Provide approved warning notices and physical protection to installations that may prove dangerous to persons either during construction or after completion. WORKERS' AMENITIES Workers' amenities on site shall comply with the standard of amenities in accordance with the Occupational Health & Safety Act and the Code of Practice for Building and Construction Workplaces issued by the Department of Labour. GENERALLY Maintain temporary buildings in good and clean conditions and clear away on completion. Where any room in the existing or new building is used as a store or workshop or the like, be responsible for the protection, cleaning and general upkeep of the area arising from such use. Do not mix materials on a floor to which any finishing surface has been applied.
A.1.31
FIRST AID
On-site first aid facilities shall be provided in accordance with the Occupational Health & Safety Act and the Code of Practice for First Aid in the Workplace issued by the Department of Labour.
A.1.32
HEARING PROTECTION
All reasonable measures shall be taken by the Contractor to reduce noise. Personal hearing devices complying with AS 1270 shall be used in all "Designated Noise Areas".
A.1.33
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
The following regular maintenance shall be allowed for as part of the main contract, not being subject to the Defects Liability provisions: Adjustment as necessary of all locks, catches, door closers and latches to all doors, windows and cupboards of joinery, 3 months during the Defects Liability Period will be required. The Contractor shall conduct an inspection at the specified interval and carry out all adjustments.
A.1.34
CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS
The Contractor shall effect full employer’s liability insurance and marine insurance for imported materials and items, comprehensive insurance for all motor vehicles used for the Works and ensure that motor vehicles belonging to sub-Contractors engaged upon the works are similarly covered.
A.1.35
CARE AND PROTECTION
Be responsible at all times for the security of the work area and protection of the Works in progress, all materials, goods, plant and equipment. Full allowance shall be made for the provision and subsequent removal of all protective measures as may be necessary or prudent to be provided for the protection of persons, structure, and finishes including but not necessarily limited to the following:
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 11 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS Drop sheets Ramps at changes in level Corner protection at all openings through which entry or egress is required Temporary removal of door furniture Barriers and visible marking to glass Protection to all floors finishes The use of bogies and hand trucks to the surfaces over which materials are being transported.
A.1.36
SHOP DRAWINGS
Shop drawings and as applicable other associated information shall be obtained and submitted in sufficient time to allow for review, amendment and re-submission before stockpiling, fabrication or fixing is programmed to be completed. Prior to submitting any Shop Drawing a Schedule of Drawings and associated Samples and Prototypes shall be prepared and submitted, as applicable, inclusive of allowance for submission, amendment and re-submission. Each Shop Drawing shall be submitted with: 3 (three) sets of prints. Initial Shop Drawings issued for the first time shall be clearly marked PRELIMINARY. Normal turnaround time for shop drawings shall be 14 days or 10 working days.
A.1.37
SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
Review and Amendment. The review procedure may require drawings to be amended more than once. Amendments where required shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings by a "cloud" or other approved means and recorded as revisions in the appropriate place on the Shop Drawing. Review by the Consultants of Shop Drawings refers to general design intent only and shall not in a any way reduce the responsibility of the Contractor and SubContractors to check site measurements, eliminate errors and omissions and to furnish such workmanship and materials, as may be required for the completion of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
A.1.38
MEETINGS
Meetings shall be convened at regular intervals all as follows: 1. Interval between meetings fourteen (14) days and seven (7) days during internal fit-out or at other times as requested by the Consultants; 2. Notification of next meeting - not less than forty eight (48) hours; 3. Circulation of minutes - three (3) days. The Contractor shall meet on the site together with other members of their staffs, Consultants, and suppliers as required, to discuss any matters relevant to the Contract. The Contractor shall chair such meetings. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 12 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.39
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
Undertake to provide warranties and guarantees, giving assurance of quality for the materials and equipment installed in the Works. Provide written guarantee where so specified elsewhere in this specification. Each guarantee shall be in an approved form and shall specifically include the provisions required herein. All guarantee periods shall commence from the date of the Notice of Practical Completion. Practical completion will not be deemed to have been achieved until all Guarantees, Warranties, Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings are provided.
A.1.40
SETTING OUT
All setting out, establishment of Benchmarks and levels shall be done by a licensed Surveyor employed by the Contractor. Employ an approved, registered Land Surveyor to set out the Work and grades and levels including check survey of existing, throughout the site. Locate all general reference points and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements for building, grading, paving and other work under this Contract. Exercise proper precautions to verify figures shown on drawings before laying out work and be responsible for any error resulting for the failure to exercise such precautions. Immediately following the stripping of formwork to concrete floor slabs at each level, established by a Licensed Surveyor, mark out by approved permanent means on concrete elements as directed, the finished floor and ceiling levels and the lines of all walls and partitions. Coordinate and be fully responsible for the accurate and comprehensive setting out of: -
The modular design of facades, ceilings, partitions, and services penetrating ceilings.
-
Pipe ducts and services in ducts and other services, including those in false ceiling spaces.
Before the Works are allowed to proceed above foundation level, the Contractor shall obtain a certificate from an independent licensed surveyor showing by means of drawings and dimensions that the Works have been correctly set out in accordance with information supplied. If the setting out is incorrect, the Contractor is to perform without extra charges all work necessary to correct it before proceeding with the Works. Obtain a certificate from the nominated Surveyor stating that: -
Finished floors are at the correct level.
-
Salient angles of the building are vertical.
If any encroachment onto the site from an adjoining property is discovered, the Contractor shall obtain instructions before proceeding with further work.
A.1.41
VERIFICATION OF BASE- STRUCTURE
Obtain and submit additional certification by a Licensed Surveyor for the setting out of each areas and level of the Works, including: Below ground work. The relationship and position of structural elements, including as applicable, piles, footings, retaining walls, lift wells, walls and columns in relation to the site boundaries and the subsequent work above.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 13 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS Above ground work. As specified above. Siteworks. Roads, paths, structures and services, including pits, grates, access and inspection points.
A.1.42
DAILY DIARY
Maintain a daily diary, which shall be available for inspection at any time without notice. List of SubContractors at the site. List of Separate Contractors at the site. Approximate number of personnel on site. Temperature range and general weather conditions. Instructions, orders and/or requests by any relevant Authority. Meetings and significant decisions. Industrial trade union requirements and industrial action. Variation orders received and/or implemented. Services connected and/or disconnected. Equipment or systems tests and start-ups. Partial completions and/or occupancies. Accidents. Unusual events. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses Emergency procedures and orders.
A.1.43
ASBESTOS, DANGEROUS AND TOXIC SUBSTANCES FOUND DURING WORK:
Report immediately if any asbestos, dangerous or toxic substances are discovered within the existing building. All found dangerous substances shall be removed or managed by a specialist Company licensed under the relevant statutory requirements. The Contractor shall obtain and submit details progressively reports and test reports from the specialist organisation.
A.1.44
HOARDINGS AND BARRICADES
Hoardings and barricades shall include properly constructed and freshly painted hoardings, barricades, screens, overhead platforms, guard rails, covers, fences, dust screens, gates, paths, gangways, gantries, and temporary enclosures for the protection of the Works, persons and property. The Contractor shall re-locate and re-erect hoardings and barricades as required during the construction period. No claim for additional cost or extension of time will be approved as a result of the requirement for moving or the timing of such requirement. The Contractor shall maintain lighting to hoardings in accordance with the requirements of the Relevant Authorities.
A.1.45
CONSTRUCTION LOADS
Ascertain safe loads from the Structural Engineer for each part of the structure during erection. These loads must not be exceeded. If necessary provide competently computed temporary supports to distribute loads safely through to other parts of the structure.
A.1.46
PAY ALL FEES
Pay all fees and charges associated with the Works including services connection and inspection fees, making good to footpath, road and vehicle crossing.
A.1.47
FENCING
Secure the Contractor’s work area by temporary chain wire type continuous fencing with gates. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of temporary fencing.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 14 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.48
SIGNBOARD
No advertising will be permitted other than a ‘Project Signboard’. Provide, erect on posts where approved and maintain until Practical Completion, a project signboard, of agreed size, as approved by the Owner. The board shall bear the names of the job, the Owner, Architect, Builder, Quantity Surveyor and Consulting Engineers. The Board shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be dismantled and removed on Practical Completion. Provide a signboard stating that unauthorised entry to the work is prohibited and showing the name of the person in charge of the work site and telephone number at which that person may be contacted outside working hours.
A.1.49
SITE ALLOWANCES AND INDUSTRIAL RELATION
Allow all Site and Award Allowances. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the administration of and the payment of all and any claims by the appropriate union or unions whether the claim is made directly against the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors for the payment of site allowances, attraction rates, disability rates or other non-award claims and payments. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the management of industrial matters relating to the Works on the Site including those affecting employees or sub-Contractors shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Prior to commencing work the Contractor shall acquaint himself with all procedural matters relating to the Works and all State and Federal Codes of conduct which may apply to the Works and with which the Contractor shall comply. Working hours shall be in accordance with awards (if applicable) restricted by the Local Authority requirements.
A.1.50
PROJECT DOCUMENTS
In general, the drawings indicate dimensions, positions and details of constructions, the specification describes qualities of material and method of workmanship. The Contractor and each of his SubContractors are responsible for examining drawings, sections of specifications and items of addenda to fully inform themselves of entire requirements of their parts of work.
A.1.51
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and by methods and means, which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including thefts. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at site and over-crowding of construction spaces. In particular, co-ordinate delivery and/or installation to ensure minimum holding or storage times for products recognised to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss.
A.1.52
CLASSIFIED DOCUMENTS
Do not disclose to third parties contract documents except with prior written approval of the Owner and subject to conditions imposed.
A.1.53
CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
During handling and installation of work as the Project proceeds, clean the site and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at a time of Practical completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary throughout remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate components to ensure all equipment operates as intended. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 15 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.54
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Quality Assurance is a part of this contract and shall be applied to the whole of the works. The quality system employed by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS ISO 9001-9003. The Contractor’s Quality Management System shall provide planning and inspection procedures to establish conformation and to identify non-conformance materials and/or items of work and to monitor and ensure its rectification.
A.1.55
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY
The Contractor shall implement Occupational Health and Safety Procedures to comply with Occupational Health and safety Act (1985) and AS 4801.
A.1.56
WELDING, CUTTING OR GRINDING IN SITU
All operations shall be carried out in accordance with AS 1674 Cutting and Welding Safety Code. Before work is commenced the Contractor’s Site Foreman must issue a Hot Work Permit. In sprinkler buildings no permit should be issued unless the installation is in commission.
A.1.57
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
The Owner reserves the right to let separate contracts for works. The Contractor shall permit all reasonable access on to the Site and Works to any separate Contractor during normal working hours and at other times only by special arrangement and with his consent. He shall not be responsible for such work. Should the Contractor be required to make any provision or provide any labour, materials or services in respect of separate contracts, the costs shall be allowed as a variation subject to submission of quotations and to their approval by the Contractor. Where so required, the Contractor shall allow for and protect such works from damage and, should any damage occur to the separate contract works due to any neglect or default of the Contractor, he shall recompense the Separate Contractor. The Contractor may claim and obtain recompense from Separate Contractor for any damage caused by them to the Works. The Owner shall be responsible for the insurance against any loss by theft or loss or damage from the like caused as are set out in the Conditions of any work executed under separate contracts or any equipment placed on the Works by him or his agents prior to the date of Practical Completion.
A.1.58
MAINTENANCE
Prior to commencement of the Defects Liability period, the Contractor shall submit a maintenance schedule appraisal, setting out maintenance procedures and frequencies to ensure trouble free operation and maintain operating efficiency. The maintenance schedule shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.
A.1.59
PUBLICITY
Do not issue any information, publication, document or article for publication concerning the project in any media without prior approval of the Owner. Refer to the Owner any inquiries concerning the project for any media.
A.1.60
SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION AND PROGRAMMING
The Contractor is responsible for programming the works and shall provide a copy of critical path or bar chart.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 16 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS A.1.61
MEASURMENT OF WORK
Building work shall be measured in accordance with the Australian Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works.
A.1.62
SAMPLES FOR TESTING
The Contractor shall if required provide samples for testing of materials or evidence of satisfactory testing and compliance for laboratories registered with the National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA).
A.1.63
SAMPLES – GENERALLY
Where specified, samples are to be submitted for inspection and once accepted shall be retained as the reference benchmark for quality, workmanship, materials and finish of the final installed item. Any deviation in the final installed item from the submitted samples may result in their rejection, Submit samples where clarification is required for additional items not specified as initially requiring samples. Once accepted, the samples shall be retained and treated in the same manner as specified as specified samples. Samples shall:
Be submitted with sufficient time to permit modifications to be made if deemed necessary and allowing not less than seven (7) working days;
Clearly indicate whether they are a specified item or an alternative to the Contract;
Be submitted with copies of relevant approval certificates and technical data where associated with essential services;
Be completed in every detail and labeled to include: name of Contractor, date submitted, make, model number, purpose of sample and relationship to the Contract documents; and
Be held on Site after inspection until built into the Works as the final unit.
Samples will be returned to the Contractor:
Marked ‘acceptable’ (subject to any comments) or
Marked ‘resubmit’ which will require the sample to be amended as required and resubmitted.
A.1.64
INSPECTIONS
Witness points: If notice of inspection is to be given in respect of parts of the Works, advise if and when those parts are to be concealed. Hold points: If notice of inspection is to be given in respect of parts of the Works, do not conceal those parts without approval. Minimum notice for inspections to be made: 4 hours for on-site inspectors, otherwise 2 working days.
A.1.65
TESTING
Where required in the Trade Section, the Contractor shall arrange and pay for the testing and submit test results and reports on products and systems to determine compliance with Contract Documents. The Contractor shall ensure sufficient time for arranging, making and obtaining the test results. The Contractor shall include cost of testing required by relevant authorities, if any. Materials subject to required testing shall not be used in the work or bought to site until test approved. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH 17
Page 17 of
GENERAL CONDITIONS Testing shall not limit the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with all relevant requirements of Contract Documents.
A.1.66
TESTING LABORATORY:
Testing shall be carried out by independent testing laboratory registered by the relevant testing control authority. The Contractor shall submit details of proposed testing laboratory. Relevant testing control authorities include: NATA National Association of Testing Authorities Australia
A.1.67
PROTECTION
Protect finish surfaces during construction to prevent damage or defacement. Where temporary coatings are used as a means of protection, remove all traces on or before completion, or before joining up to other surfaces.
A.1.68
USE OF PROPRIETARY NAMES
The naming of proprietary products is used to indicate design intent and quality requirements and nominate products which may be suitable. The naming of proprietary products shall not limit or modify the responsibility of the Contractor to select and install products which comply with the Contract Documents, and shall not over-ride the requirement to comply with the statutory performance or safety requirements. Products by alternative manufactures of equivalent products may be submitted for approval subject to compliance with all requirements. Before commencing, submit verification of correct product selection for substrates, conditions and performance requirements in accordance with manufacture’s selection instructions and obtain approval in writing before commencing. Where a named product does not comply with statutory performance or safety requirements obtain directions before proceeding.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 9
DEMOLITION CONTENTS
B. B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 B.7 B.8 B.9 B.10 B.11 B.12 B.13 B.14 B.15 B.16 B.17 B.18 B.19 B.20 B.21 B.22 B.23
DEMOLITION .......................................................................................... 2 SCOPE ........................................................................................................ 2 EXTENT OF WORKS .................................................................................. 2 SERVICES DEMOLITION............................................................................ 2 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING SERVICE LINES ........................................... 3 TREE REMOVAL ......................................................................................... 3 FENCES TO BE REMOVED........................................................................ 4 BACK-FILLING ............................................................................................ 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 4 STANDARD ................................................................................................. 4 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 5 SPECIAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS ............................................. 5 CUTTING OR GRINDING IN SITU .......................................................... 5 SUPPORT ................................................................................................ 5 UTILITIES AND SERVICES ..................................................................... 6 EXECUTION ............................................................................................ 6 TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING ............................................... 7 MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 7 DISPOSAL AND CLEANUP ..................................................................... 7 NEIGHBOURING PROPERTIES ............................................................. 8 SURVEY OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES ................................................. 8 SITE RESTORATION............................................................................... 8 SITE PREPARATION ............................................................................... 8 CLEARING AND MAKING GOOD ........................................................... 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 9
DEMOLITION B.
DEMOLITION
B.1
SCOPE
GENERALLY Examine the Contract drawings to establish the extent of the items and materials to be demolished. Where questions or discrepancies exist, obtain the Superintendent’s ruling on the extent or intent of such discrepancies before commencing work. Perform all demolition required in order to carry out and complete the Works, whether or not such demolition are shown on the drawings or specifically mentioned here or in other sections of the specification. Demolition works shall include all additional cutting away, dismantling, removal and alterations necessary for fitting out, alignment, matching installation of services and/or equipment and other incidental works.
B.2
EXTENT OF WORKS
The scope of work described in this Section, shall include the Demolition work in the existing buildings, and in the area of the Works as shown on the Drawings and the staging of the Works as provided by the Principal. General: Demolition work shall include, but not be limited to the following: Demolition, cutting, sealing and termination of services and fittings as noted on the drawings; Demolition and disconnection of redundant electrical power and lighting and fire services noted on the drawings; Demolition, cutting and sealing of redundant hydraulic services including sanitary wastes and cold water piping as noted on the drawings; Demolition and disconnection of redundant telephone services as noted on the drawings; Removal or demolition of all other items noted elsewhere in the Demolition Drawing. Excluded: The Principal will make arrangements for the taking down and removal of existing fitments and fittings from those areas to be demolished, altered or renovated, prior to the commencement of the Works on site or at an agreeable time to both parties. All other items and materials shall become the property of the Contractor, who shall make arrangements for their removal from the site. Existing drains, pipes and services may be encountered during demolition, these services shall be fully investigated and shall be either cut and sealed, removed, diverted, protected and maintained. All dead water and waste pipes shall be removed wherever possible or where approved, sealed, buried and/or concealed within the structure. Termination of existing services: Where termination of existing services is required, the Contractor will undertake to terminate the particular service, given sufficient notice and at a mutually agreeable time to both parties.
B.3
SERVICES DEMOLITION
STRUCTURAL DEMOLITION Refer Consultant’s drawings and specification and Relevant AS Codes. Obtain the Superintendent’s ruling for materials to be stored and reused.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 9
DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, HYDRAULICS, FIRE AND OTHER SERVICES DEMOLITION Refer Consultants drawings and specifications. Obtain the Superintendent’s ruling for materials to be stored and reused.
B.4
(a)
Electrical The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Sub Contractor, who shall disconnect the power to make safe for demolition. Thereafter the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all redundant electrical wiring, conduits, fittings and fixtures and the provision of temporary power for the works.
(b)
Fire Detection The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Sub Contractor, who shall disconnect the fire detection system to make safe for demolition. Thereafter the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all redundant fire detection wiring, conduits, fittings and fixtures.
(c)
Civil & Hydraulics (includes fire service, cold water, hot water and sanitary) The Contractor shall demolish and remove all redundant hydraulic services. Refer to drawings for general extent of new works. Contractor to inspect the works to ascertain and allow for extent of stripping out, removal, making good and sealing off.
DEMOLITION OF EXISTING SERVICE LINES
Identify the location of all existing services. When demolition Works are required in the vicinity of existing services installations, the Contractor shall accept responsibility and take particular care to avoid damage to the services. If the existing installation is gas service, the Contractor shall give at least 48 hours notice to the local Gas Supply Company and arrange for the Supply Company’s Inspector to be present on site during demolition Works which could affect the installation. All damage to any services installations shall be reported to the Superintendent immediately and all necessary repair work and making good done by the Contractor, in accordance with the relevant Authority's requirements. The Contractor shall pay all fees and costs, including costs of restoration and testing of damaged services installations. The Works of this Contract shall proceed without interruption to existing services and the use of adjacent buildings. All services that are encountered or interfered with as result of the Works of this Contract shall be fully investigated, and, where necessary, diverted or altered. Existing services that are required to remain shall be protected, supported and maintained as the exigencies of the case may require. All dead service lines shall be cut, sealed and removed in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Controlling Authorities.
B.5
TREE REMOVAL
Remove trees and stumps (including major roots and all shoots) where indicated on drawings by sawing and with a "stump-remover" or similar approved equipment. All shoots to be treated with a systemic non-residual herbicide ("Round-up" or similar approved) prior to all earthworks/grading Works and on a regular basis until complete eradication. Maximum number of treatments: As necessary. Remove all wood, leaves, roots and debris. Burning of debris on site is not allowed. Topsoil shall be stripped prior to stump removal and stockpiled on site. After removal, all debris and wood chips shall be removed and disposed of.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 9
DEMOLITION Grub-hole to be inspected by Superintendent and Works to receive approval before backfill can be carried out. Supply and spread sufficient soil to backfill stump holes. In areas to be covered by new pavements, all tree roots of 10mm diameter and greater shall be excavated and removed. The excavation shall be back-filled with fill material as noted on the drawings and compacted in layers as noted on the drawings. Only trees to be removed are shown on the drawings. The Contractor is to allow for the removal of all shrubs and bushes from the area of the Works.
B.6
FENCES TO BE REMOVED
Remove all fences indicated on the drawings. Install additional posts, plates, rails. Etc. as may be required to adequately support the ends of remaining fences.
B.7
BACK-FILLING
All trenches excavated for the removal of footings, services, trees, etc. shall be back-filled as follows: Under future pavements: Class 3 FCR compacted in 150 mm loose layers to 100% standard. Under landscaped areas: Clean on site material compacted to the density of the surrounding soil.
B.8
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide all labour, equipment, plant and materials necessary for the proper protection and execution of the works. The work shall be carried out as the responsibility of and at the entire risk of the Contractor who shall indemnify the Owner against all claims resulting therefrom and shall take out any additional insurance policies required to cover himself and the Owner. Conform to the provisions of any Acts of Parliament relating to the Works and to the Regulations and By- Laws of Local Authorities and he shall give all notices required by the said Acts, Regulations and by-laws and pay all fees in respect thereof. Maintain existing components in stable condition until the sequence of the Work progresses sufficiently to enable their demolition as required. Give at least 2 days notice to the adjoining owners of intention to commence demolition and make any necessary arrangements with them. Complete demolition works in stages and do all demolition during normal working hours. The use of pneumatic tools and similar noisy equipment shall be restricted to hours agreed by the Principal. Provide barricades and fences to the building with substantial gates and equipment with good locks. Keep working area locked when work is not in progress. Provide signs to exclude unauthorized persons from entering working area.
B.9
STANDARD
Carry out Demolition Works in accordance with AS 2601 SAA Demolition Code. Keep a copy of AS 2601 on the site.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 9
DEMOLITION Comply with: AS 2436 Guide to noise control on construction, maintenance and demolition sites. National Occupational Health and Safety (Asbestos) Regulations 1992. Work Safe Australia Synthetic Mineral Fibre National Standard and National Code of Practice.
B.10
GENERALLY
Before commencing demolition the Contractor shall submit evidence that: 1. Requirements of Authorities relating to the work under the Contract have been ascertained. 2. A Scaffold Permit has been obtained from the appropriate Authority; 3. All precautions necessary for protection of persons and property have been taken and suitable protective devices provided to the approval of the relevant authority; 4. Submit two copies of proposed demolition methods and obtain permission to use before starting work. Show the proposed sequence of demolitions, including sequence and times for disconnection and reconnection of services.
B.11
SPECIAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
Submit proposed demolition methods for: All existing slab penetrations. Protection scaffolding and dropping required. Structural steel and reinforced concrete Allow for propping any floor that may have rubble accumulated during construction. Slabs to be demolished shall have the corners predrilled to prevent over-cutting. The slabs may be fully saw-cut except in areas where the slab reinforcement must be tied into new concrete. All exposed sawcut bars shall be coated with approved zinc rich epoxy paint.
B.12
CUTTING OR GRINDING IN SITU
All operations shall be carried out in accordance with AS 1674 Cutting and Welding Safety Code. Flame-cutting shall be carried out by experienced and qualified personnel. Protect adjacent combustible surfaces during flame cutting. Comply with the Building Code of Australia (Clause E1.9) and requirements of relevant authorities.
B.13
SUPPORT
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the existing components in stable conditions until the sequence of the work progresses sufficiently to enable their demolition required. Provide all temporary shoring, props, toms, bracing, and other supporting members necessary to prevent collapse, subsidence, deflection, distortion, and other movements likely to occur in existing structures as a result of demolition works.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 9
DEMOLITION B.14
UTILITIES AND SERVICES
Give all notices to water, gas, lighting and power companies and shall allow them facilities for removing any fixtures, fittings, fittings or services which may belong to them. Notify Utility Companies of all utilities to be cut off, modified or relocated. Maintain active utilities and protect them.
B.15
EXECUTION
All portions of the building, utilities, items, etc. noted to be removed shall be demolished and removed from the site. All services lines not to be reused shall be capped. All vehicles and containers used by the Contractor for the transport of rubbish and debris materials shall be so constructed as to prevent spillage. In the event of any such vehicle being condemned by the Superintendent as leaky or otherwise unsuitable it shall be withdrawn from the work immediately. All salvageable items not indicated to be relocated or retained by the Principal shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site. All salvage, waste or debris shall be removed from the site and not allowed to accumulate. Protect existing paving and road from damage during Demolition work. Locate containers for demolished materials on the site. Do not locate containers on public streets or footpaths without approval. If approved, obtain required permits from relevant authorities. Do not damage structural members required to remain after demolition. Do not stack or concentrate demolished materials on existing work in excess of live load capacity. Provide temporary and permanent support structures as required. Comply with the relevant codes. AS 1170
Minimum design loads on structures. (SAA Loading Code)
Carry out temporary and demolition work so that water and weather are excluded from the interior side of the system in all weather conditions. Notify immediately if demolition reveals existing construction or materials to remain which may be defective, or not able to support permanent loads, or any unusual conditions. Do not proceed with demolition in the affected area until directed. Unless directed to repair and make good such defective work by suitable means, defective work shall be demolished. Do not drop or throw demolished materials. Lower by means of hoists, cranes or chutes. Materials shall be dampened to minimise dirt and dust, without causing water damage or nuisance. Fit trucks with covers. Do not over-load trucks or spill debris on public streets. Services required to be cut and sealed shall be carried out to the requirements of the relevant services authorities and the Superintendent. Preserve, protect, structurally support and maintain any existing services in use on the site. Remove redundant service lines and other obstacles to the construction of the Works. Pay disconnection fees. Return any disused meters to the supply authority or company.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 9
DEMOLITION Give all notices and pay all costs for disconnection, sealing off. Diverting to taking out all drains, water, gas, electrical and other services encountered during the work within the area to be demolished, and as directed by the Superintendents and any Authorities having jurisdiction over the work. Meters are to be returned to the appropriate supply authority, where not required to be re-used. If the existing services are to be continued in use, repair, divert or relocate as required. Maintain services external to the site in working order and ensure that their manholes, inspection and lamp holes and the like are protected from damage and continuously accessible. For the duration of the building works, the Contractor is to ascertain that disconnection of services will not effect the required operations of the existing building usage. Information given in the Contract documents on existing services has been compiled from available sources and does not purport to be a complete record. Refer to Drawings for demolition of services. Demolition of all services shall be by licensed tradesmen and including electrical wiring, plumbing pipes, plant room equipment and so on.
B.16
TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING
Take precautions to guard against movement, settlement, distortion or collapse of any part of existing structure, services or utilities. Provide adequate bracing and shoring to safeguard the building and personnel.
B.17
MATERIALS
All demolished material unless otherwise directed on site and not required for re-use shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Where items to be removed are the property of Authorities, give appropriate notice to the Authorities and pay required costs for disconnection and removal. Notify immediately if any of the following are found: Asbestos Toxic, infective of contaminated materials Radiation or radio-active materials ASBESTOS: Use wet removal methods recommended in the Code of Practice for the Removal of Asbestos (NOHSC: 2002) including Part 4 for insulation and lagging, and Part 9 for asbestos cement.
B.18
DISPOSAL AND CLEANUP
Haul rubbish and debris away from site promptly and dispose of legally. During entire period of demolition, if necessary, keep area sprinkled to reduce dust in air. Unless approved in writing by the relevant authority and the Superintendent, do not:
Close or obstruct public footpaths or streets. Place or store equipment or materials on public footpaths or streets. Interfere with public vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 9
DEMOLITION Except where placed in suitable disposal containers, combustible material and debris shall be removed daily and not accumulated on site. Debris shall not be burned on site. Prevent the encroachment of demolished materials onto adjacent property and public places
B.19
NEIGHBOURING PROPERTIES
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the rights and interests of Owners and Occupiers of adjoining and neighbouring properties are not impaired or impeded as a result of the works under this Contract, or by the operations of the Contractor and Subcontractors during the currency of the Contract. Where adjoining or neighbouring properties or facilities are damaged as a result of negligence or carelessness or inefficiency by the Contractor, the Contractor shall immediately repair all such damage and make good to surfaces without cost to the Owner or to the Owners of other properties. Delays to this Contract arising out of disputes with owners and/or occupiers of neighbouring properties which, in the opinion of the Superintendent, are due to default by the Contractor or to any action not authorized under this Contract, shall not entitle the Contractor to extension of Contract time or to any additional payment under this Contract.
B.20
SURVEY OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES
Before commencing work on site, the Contractor shall make a detailed survey of those sections of the adjoining building/s, roads and services adjacent to this work, in conjunction with the Superintendent and a representative of the adjoining Owner. Carefully record all visible defects and prepare a survey report including all sketches, notes and photographs. The Contractor shall forward a complete signed copy of the report to the Superintendent and Owner as soon as practicable. On completion of the Works the Contractor, in the presence of a representative of the adjoining Owner, shall inspect the previously surveyed property. Any damage or defects recorded which are not shown on the initial survey documents referred to above shall be made good by the Contractor at the Contractor's cost, without delay.
B.21
SITE RESTORATION
On completion of the work, restore the ground surfaces of the site to the condition existing at the commencement, or as required for subsequent construction, as appropriate. Level off disturbed surfaces and remove or stock-pile excavated material for later use in locations as directed by the Superintendent. Surplus excavated material not re-useable as filling shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site to a legal disposal location.
B.22
SITE PREPARATION
B.23
CLEARING AND MAKING GOOD
Remove everything on or above the site surface, including rubbish, scrap, grass, vegetable matter and organic debris, scrub, trees, timber, stumps, boulders and rubble. Grub out stumps and roots and backfill with sand material to prevent ponding of water. The material shall be compacted to the relative density of the existing adjacent ground material.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 9
DEMOLITION Remove old works, including slabs, foundations, paving, drains and manholes found on the surface. Components and finishes on or within the remaining structures which are damaged during demolition or construction work or which are cut to suit alterations shall be made good in approved manner and in accordance with this specification and good trade practice at no additional cost to the Owner. On completion of the demolition work clean the remaining or adjacent areas free fro dust debris etc, to the approval of the Superintendent.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 13
EXCAVATION INDEX
BB. EXCAVATION ..................................................................................................... 3 BB.1 SCOPE OF WORKS .................................................................................... 3 BB.2 STANDARDS ............................................................................................... 3 BB.3 TRENCHING REGULATIONS – EARTHWORKS ........................................ 3 BB.4 METHOD OF WORKING ............................................................................. 4 BB.5 SOIL CONDITIONS ...................................................................................... 4 BB.6 REFERENCE MARKS AND LEVELS........................................................... 4 BB.7 PROTECTION .............................................................................................. 4 BB.8 ROAD SIGNS, LIGHTS & BARRIERS ......................................................... 5 BB.9 TIMBERING OF EXCAVATION ................................................................... 5 BB.10 RESPONSIBILITY ........................................................................................ 5 BB.11 EXISTING SERVICES.................................................................................. 5 BB.12 EXISTING FOOTINGS ................................................................................. 5 BB.13 ADJACENT STRUCTURES ......................................................................... 5 BB.14 CLEARING ................................................................................................... 6 BB.15 CUT AND FILL EARTHWORK ..................................................................... 6 BB.16 PUMPING..................................................................................................... 7 BB.17 BULK EXCAVATION .................................................................................... 7 BB.18 FINE EXCAVATION ..................................................................................... 7 BB.19 TRENCH EXCAVATION - GENERALLY ...................................................... 7 BB.20 EXCAVATION FOR FOOTINGS .................................................................. 7 BB.21 EXCAVATION FOR SLABS ......................................................................... 7 BB.22 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS ............................................................... 8 BB.23 EXCAVATION FOR SURFACE DRAINS ..................................................... 8 BB.24 EXCAVATION FOR SERVICES ................................................................... 8 BB.25 EXCAVATION FOR PITS ............................................................................. 8 BB.26 REMOVAL OF SOFT AREAS OR UNSUITABLE MATERIAL ...................... 8 BB.27 EXCAVATION IN PUBLIC AREAS ............................................................... 8 BB.28 EXCESSIVE EXCAVATION-FOOTINGS ..................................................... 9 BB.29 IN EXCAVATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL FOOTINGS .................................. 9 BB.30 BELOW PAVEMENTS ................................................................................. 9 BB.31 BELOW ALL OTHER AREAS ...................................................................... 9 BB.32 EXISTING SERVICES.................................................................................. 9 BB.33 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL .................................................................................. 9 BB.34 SURFACE GRADING................................................................................. 10 BB.35 GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION .................................................................. 10 BB.36 ADJACENT STRUCTURES ....................................................................... 10 BB.37 GENERAL FILLING .................................................................................... 10 BB.38 FILLING MATERIAL ................................................................................... 10 BB.39 COMPACTION ........................................................................................... 10 BB.40 BACKFILLING ............................................................................................ 11 BB.41 MOISTURE CONTENT .............................................................................. 11 BB.42 SURFACE FILLING .................................................................................... 11 BB.43 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 11 BB.44 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................ 12
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.45 BB.46 BB.47 BB.48 BB.49 BB.50
SAFETY AND SUSPENSION OF WORK: ................................................. 12 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADE SECTIONS:............................... 12 BEARING SURFACES: .............................................................................. 12 OVER-EXCAVATION AND REINSTATEMENT: ........................................ 13 ROCK REMOVAL ...................................................................................... 13 BAD/CONTAMINATED GROUND ............................................................. 13
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 13
EXCAVATION
BB.
EXCAVATION
BB.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
The work specified in this section covers clearance and site strip, excavation, filling, backfilling, compaction and all other operations necessary for sub-grades for new walls, concrete slab, footings, pits and other work shown on drawings. General: the scope of work described in this section shall include the earthworks for the new construction. Included: work shall include, but not be limited to the following: excavation for, and establishment of, a compacted fill platform to support reinforced concrete suspended ground floor slabs and the site preparation to new levels; excavation for drainage work, etc.; importing of filling, spreading of fill, compaction, etc.; removal and tipping of any excess materials. While excavations are left open, the contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent accidents, and shall provide suitable temporary barriers, fences, bridges, ramps, warning signs, lighting, and any other necessary protective devices at all locations of potential risk. Carry out the work so as to avoid erosion, contamination, and sedimentation of the site, surrounding areas, and drainage system.
BB.2
STANDARDS
Comply with: AS 3798
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR EARTHWORKS
AS 1289
METHODS OF TESTING SOILS FOR ENGINEERING PURPOSES
AS 2758
AGGREGATES AND ROCK FOR ENGINEERING PURPOSES
AS 1141
METHODS FOR SAMPLING AND TESTING AGGREGATES
AS 1726
SITE INVESTIGATION CODE
AS 4482
GUIDE TO SAMPLING AND INVESTIGATION OF POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED SOIL.
BS 6031
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR EARTHWORKS
BB.3
TRENCHING REGULATIONS – EARTHWORKS
All trenches required to be deeper than 1.5 metres shall conform with the applicable requirements of the 1985 occupational health and safety act and the health and safety organisation code of practice for safety precautions in trenching operations 1988. Excavation of all such trenches must be carried out under the supervision of an ‘appropriately trained and competent excavation supervisor’ as defined by the health and safety organisation (construction excavation information bulletin no. 7).
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.4
METHOD OF WORKING
All site works required under this contract shall be performed in a manner which: has regard for the network of existing services within the site; conforms to the requirements of controlling authorities; ensures the safety of all persons on or adjacent to the site while the work is in progress; ensures protection from damage to all existing structures, facilities, etc., which are required to remain in position; ensures strict control and minimises the effects of noise, vibration, dust, mud, smoke, fumes, interruption or hindrance of access, and any other nuisance which could adversely affect the occupants of adjacent buildings and all other persons on or adjacent to the site while the work is in progress. conforms to the requirements of as 3798.
BB.5
SOIL CONDITIONS
The site is required to have been visited and an assessment made of conditions likely to be encountered. no extra will be entertained with respect to any variations in sub-soil conditions encountered. Examine the site, drawings and records of soil testing. soil testing reports are made available for information only and are not guaranteed to represent all sub-surface conditions that will be encountered. the contractor is to formulate his own conclusions and remove all material of any nature to the design subgrades indicated or herein after specified.
BB.6
REFERENCE MARKS AND LEVELS
Existing levels indicated on the contract drawings are given for guidance only and shall be checked by the contractor. All setting out, establishment of benchmarks and levels shall be done by the licensed surveyor employed by the contractor Provide within the site a permanent benchmark for duration of the contract, properly referenced and marked, and verified by a licensed surveyor. Provide sufficient reference levels to permit check levelling of any area with one instrument setup. Maintain carefully all benchmarks and other reference points. replace as directed any such points disturbed.
BB.7
PROTECTION
Be responsible for the safety of building and for sufficiency of all temporary works. provide all temporary structures necessary to retain the sides of the excavations, and to ensure safe working. provide safety covers over holes. provide any necessary temporary structures, needling, shoring and strutting to adjacent structures. Protect newly graded areas from the action of weather. repair any settlement or erosion which occurs and re-establish grades to the required slopes. Fill and consolidate to levels required wherever settlement occurs.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.8
ROAD SIGNS, LIGHTS & BARRIERS
Provide and be responsible for warning lights, signs, barriers and other facilities that may be required to ensure the safety of traffic and personnel when on site. Do not commence construction works until all necessary warning lights, signs and barriers have been erected.
BB.9
TIMBERING OF EXCAVATION
Where necessary to protect workmen or to protect other construction, including pavements, the sides of the excavations shall be supported by sheeting, walling, props, struts, bracing or other suitable methods to ensure the stability of the ground and any adjoining works supports shall be of ample strength and well secured against displacement. remove supports during backfilling. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for the safety of the excavation and for the design and construction of the supports.
BB.10
RESPONSIBILITY
Be entirely responsible for the safety and stability of all structures, services and property in the vicinity of the works in so far as they may be affected by operations under this contract. In particular, the contractor shall be responsible for all damage to buildings, roads, footpaths, drains, sewers, gas pipes, electrical and telephone services and all other structures and services brought about by settlement, subsidence or removal of support consequent upon operations under this contract and shall make good all damage at his own expense. in all excavations which could cause settlement, subsidence or loss of support to surrounding land or buildings, the contractor shall design and erect such temporary shoring, strutting, bracing, retaining walls or other structures as may be necessary to adequately support the walls of the excavations. All temporary supports shall remain in place until the thrust loads can be taken by the structure of the new building and then only after properly consolidated filling has been deposited against the building structure or new retaining walls.
BB.11
EXISTING SERVICES
Verify the positions of existing services before commencing excavations disconnect or seal services on the site as required by the works of this contract. Ensure that adjoining properties are not deprived of continuous supply. Disconnect and remove the temporary services when no longer required.
BB.12
EXISTING FOOTINGS
CONFIRM WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER THE FOLLOWING: Where footings from demolished buildings encroach into excavations for new footings, remove the existing footing completely from the space to be occupied by the new footing.
BB.13
ADJACENT STRUCTURES
Adjacent structures: provide supports to adjacent structures where necessary, sufficient to prevent damage resulting from the works.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.14
CLEARING
Do all clearing and grubbing required before commencing any earthworks in the area. Clearing shall include the removal of all foreign material and vegetation. All material removed by clearing shall become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site.
BB.15
CUT AND FILL EARTHWORK
The area of the site indicated by the drawings shall be cut, filled, compacted, and finished to the correct levels, grades, and shapes. Unless otherwise specified, the formation shall be built up on filled areas with good quality material selected from the excavated soil taken from cut areas. all material used for filling shall be clean, free from organic matter, rubbish, debris, rocks larger than 50mm diameter, and other unstable and unsuitable materials, and of type and moisture content suitable for compaction to the required densities. If necessary to maintain optimum moisture content, the contractor shall evenly dampen the material with water if it is too dry, or drain and work the material if it is too wet, until the required consistency is achieved. The filling material shall be evenly spread in horizontal layers of not more than 150mm loose thickness, and each layer well compacted before the following layer is placed. Asoft and excessively wet areas of formation shall be cut out, re-filled and re-compacted to the required density. Unless otherwise specified, the compacted density of the material, when tested in accordance with the relevant requirements of as 1289, shall not be less than: -
FOR AREAS COVERED BY PAVEMENTS AND BUILDINGS: FOR ALL OTHER AREAS
100% STANDARD MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY 90% STANDARD MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY
The formation shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of as1289, at the rate of one test to each 100 sq.metres of area of filling per layer. provide all necessary equipment and labour, perform all tests required, and pay all costs associated with testing. Areas of formation which do not achieve the required density under test shall be cut out, re-filled, recompacted, and re-tested as above until the required density is achieved. Except where retaining walls are required, all cut and filled banks shall be evenly graded to smooth consistent batters at slopes and shapes indicated on the drawings if grades of batters are not indicated on the drawings, batters shall be formed to the natural angle of repose of the filling material, with cut banks graded to equal the batters of the filled banks. After completion of bulk cutting and filling (including compaction and satisfactory testing), the surface shall be evenly graded and trimmed to the required levels, grades and shapes, and the surfaces consolidated by rolling and tamping, to finish within a tolerance of -0 +10mm of the required levels and lines.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.16
PUMPING
Keep all excavated areas free from water during the progress of the works by pumping or other suitable means.
BB.17
BULK EXCAVATION
Excavate to the levels indicated on drawings within a tolerance of plus 50 mm. trim the finished surfaces neatly and evenly. do all cutting and grading required. Excavation shall be performed in a methodical manner and in such a way that the surface at all time drains. Loose soil, bad ground or cavities met within any part of the excavations shall be excavated to a solid foundation and filled to formation level with material.
BB.18
FINE EXCAVATION
Do all excavations for footings, drains, underground services, paving, kerbs, underpinnings and other works required. Excavations shall have solid bottoms, level or stepped as required. where necessary consolidate the bottoms of excavations to receive concrete.
BB.19
TRENCH EXCAVATION - GENERALLY
Except where otherwise directed or approved trench excavation shall be carried out by the open cut method, from the surface in accordance with the lines, grades and depths indicated on drawings. the width of trench generally shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus 500 mm. Where trench excavations are to be through existing asphalt or concrete paved areas, the sides of the trench shall be defined by sawing through the pavement. Where trench excavations are to be through lawn, the side of the trench shall be defined by cutting the turf into sods of convenient size with all topsoil under them. The sods and topsoil shall be stacked and reused if so instructed. Excavations being prepared when rain is imminent shall have the last 75 mm of the excavation left, this material being removed immediately prior to the placement of reinforcement or bedding material.
BB.20
EXCAVATION FOR FOOTINGS
Excavations shall be taken out to solid foundation in accordance with the requirements for the works and trimmed to the required shapes and alignment. Confirm that the foundation conditions meet the design bearing conditions.
BB.21
EXCAVATION FOR SLABS
All turf and topsoil shall be removed and excavations taken out to the required dimensions, levels, grades, and shapes, with allowance for thickness of slabs and base courses, and provision for ribs, edge beams, and other associated concrete members and shapes. All soft patches and areas of uncompacted filling shall be removed from the base and all low areas filled to the required levels with approved, compacted filling, as specified under back-filling.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 13
EXCAVATION After filling and compaction of low areas, the full area of the base surface prepared for each slab shall be compacted to 100% standard maximum dry density (when tested in accordance with as 1289) and finally trimmed and rolled to form an evenly smooth dense surface at the required level or grade (within an acceptable tolerance of +0 -10mm).
BB.22
EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
All turf and topsoil and loose material shall be removed and excavations taken out and prepared to suit the type of pavement required, well compacted and graded to the correct levels, grades and shapes, with allowances for thicknesses of pavements and base formations as applicable. all low areas shall be then filled with approved well compacted filling as specified. Removal of any excessively loose and rubble filling, tree roots etc. the exposed area is then to be proof rolled with a minimum of five passes with a medium weight (minimum six tonne static weight) vibrating flat roller to ensure that no localised soft spots exist. if any such areas exist they are to be excavated and back-filled with approved granular material compacted to a density approaching that of the surrounding material. all low areas shall be then filled with approved well compacted filling as specified. the surface of the sub-grade is then to be compacted to 100% standard density in accordance with as 1289.
BB.23
EXCAVATION FOR SURFACE DRAINS
Excavations for kerbs, kerb and channel drains, and other in-situ concrete drains shall be taken out to lines and grades to suit the required shapes and dimensions. Bottoms of excavations shall be prepared for the concrete construction, with additional depth allowance for the crushed rock bedding.
BB.24
EXCAVATION FOR SERVICES
Excavations for services shall conform to the requirements of relevant controlling authorities and shall be taken out to the layouts, levels and grades necessary for the installation of the services in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.
BB.25
EXCAVATION FOR PITS
Excavations for inspection chambers, manholes, stormwater pits, and other similar services pits shall be taken out to the required sizes, shapes and depths in accordance with the requirements of the drawings and (where applicable) controlling authorities.
BB.26
REMOVAL OF SOFT AREAS OR UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
Where soft, wet or otherwise unstable material which exists or develops during construction in areas upon which backfill is to be placed or structures or pavement are to be constructed below formation level in areas of excavation. such areas may include fill material placed and compacted. the unsuitable material thus excavated shall be removed from the site and disposed of at areas provided by the contractor. The bottom of such excavations shall be compacted with suitable approved equipment to 95% standard compaction prior to filling.
BB.27
EXCAVATION IN PUBLIC AREAS
Cut through footpath and roadway surfaces as necessary and excavate to required depths for services and vehicular crossings and make good to the satisfaction of the local authority.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.28
EXCESSIVE EXCAVATION-FOOTINGS
Over-excavation and consequent additional backfilling will not be permitted as evidence justifying a variation to the contract sum nor for extension of the contract time. All over cut shall be filled to the required level or width at the contractor’s expense in accordance with the following requirements:
BB.29
IN EXCAVATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL FOOTINGS
Fill to the level of underside of footing with well-compacted 15 mpa concrete conforming to the requirements of specification section: concrete. Where filling of over-cut in sides of excavations is necessary, temporary formwork shall be provided to support the concrete and then completely removed after the concrete has set. the over-cut spaces shall then be filled and compacted with clean selected material.
BB.30
BELOW PAVEMENTS
Filled with class 2 crushed rock (conforming with Vic roads specification section 812), placed in layers as described above and each layer compacted to 100% standard maximum dry density.
BB.31
BELOW ALL OTHER AREAS
Filled with clean material selected from site excavation and placed in 150mm maximum loose layers with each layer compacted to 90% standard maximum dry density.
BB.32
EXISTING SERVICES
Identify the location of all existing services when excavation works are required in the vicinity of existing services installations, the contractor shall accept responsibility and take particular care to avoid damage to the services. If the existing installation is gas service, the contractor shall give at least 48 hours notice to the gas and fuel corporation and arrange for the corporation's inspector to be present on site during excavation works which could affect the installation excavation shall not commence unless the inspector is present. All damage to any services installations shall be reported immediately and all necessary repair work and making good done in accordance with the relevant authority's requirements all fees and costs, including costs of restoration and testing of damaged services installations shall be paid by the contractor.
BB.33
DISPOSAL OF SPOIL
All debris and discarded materials, including brickbats, rock fragments, cement bags, timber offcuts, and the like shall be cleared up and removed from the site. under no circumstances shall these materials be buried on the site. Dispose of all solid, liquid and gaseous contaminants in accordance with statutory requirements. Remove from the site all refuse, including food scraps and the like where resulting from work under the contract.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 10 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.34
SURFACE GRADING
The areas of the site affected by the works and surrounding the new structures and pavements shall be made good to finish with even surfaces at the required contoured shapes and levels.
BB.35
GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
Before installation of geotextile, trim ground or filter material to a smooth surface free of cavities and projections. place polypropylene or polyethylene, water permeable, ultraviolet and weather resistant geotextile. comply with as 3705 - geotextiles.
BB.36
ADJACENT STRUCTURES
Provide supports to adjacent structures where necessary, sufficient to prevent damage arising from the works. provide lateral support using shoring. provide vertical support where necessary using piling or underpinning or both. if encroachment from adjacent structures are encountered and are not shown on the drawings, give notice and obtain instructions.
BB.37
GENERAL FILLING
Prepare the subgrade for floors by excavating and filling and compacting in layers all layers of cut surface shall be within 85% to 115% of optimum moisture content compact the layers of cut to 100% standard maximum dry density based on the standard compaction test in accordance with current as requirements. Finally trim and roll to produce a dense, even surface finishing not more than 10 mm above the required levels at any point. Fill all holes caused by removal of stumps, roots and other obstructions within building area and compacted to match surrounding area. Fill and backfill under paving area in 150 mm layers, water and compact with a mechanical tamper or suitable vibrating roller to 95% modified compaction with final 300 mm compacted to 98% modified compaction. Fill other areas in grounds where shown on drawings to at least 95% standard compaction.
BB.38
FILLING MATERIAL
Filling shall consist of clean uniform granular materials, free from clay, vegetable and other deleterious matter and capable of compaction so that is firm and unyielding throughout its depth. add sand or similar fine material as necessary to ensure a regular firm surface. Suitability of all materials for filling shall be determined by a nata approved testing laboratory. Provide a 15 kg representative sample of the proposed filling material.
BB.39
COMPACTION
All fill areas shall be brought up to levels by compaction of the fill material in layers placed 150 mm and then compacted. the fill material shall be watered as necessary to achieve the specified compaction.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 11 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.40
BACKFILLING
Backfill under footpath or roadways to the approval of the local authority with class 2 20 n.s. fine crushed rock or other approved granular filling compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Backfill of trenches of stormwater, sewerage and other service trenches in paved areas and under supporting slab with class 2, 20 mm crushed rock compacted in maximum 150 mm layers to achieve 97% dry density ratio at optimum moisture conditions. Backfill of trenches of stormwater, sewerage and other service lines shall be carried out immediately and continuously following the testing and approval of the drains by the authority.
BB.41
MOISTURE CONTENT
Provide equipment capable of adding a measured amount of moisture to the soil material as determined by moisture-density relation tests. Where the subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply the required amount of water to the surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, in such manner as to prevent free water appearing on the surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to the specified percentage of maximum density. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction, may be stockpiled or spread on the surface where directed. and permitted to dry assist drying by an approved method until the moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture- density relation tests.
BB.42
SURFACE FILLING
The surface layers of filling at tops of excavations shall conform to the following requirements as applicable: In grassed areas, the turf sods which are removed and stored during excavation works shall be set firmly in position with tops flush with the adjacent turf surfaces, using good quality topsoil or sandy loam as bedding and as filling around all sides of the sods. In other unpaved areas (excluding garden beds), good quality topsoil selected from the topsoil stockpile on site shall be placed and packed to fill the excavation and finished with a slight mound to allow for settlement. In paved areas, the pavements shall be made good after backfilling of excavations by placement of new pavement materials of similar type, colour, thickness and finish to match closely with the existing pavements. surfaces of new areas of pavement shall finish flush with existing pavement surfaces. In garden beds, the top of the excavations shall be filled to the level of the garden bed with good quality garden soil of type similar to that of the existing garden soil
BB.43
MAINTENANCE
Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free of trash and debris. repair and reinstate grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. Where subsequent construction operations or adverse weather disturbs completed compacted areas, scarify the surface, reshape and compact to the required density prior to further construction. use hand tamping for re-compaction over underground utilities, if any.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 12 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.44
EXCAVATION
Carry out bulk and detailed excavation to correct levels, falls and profiles in conditions as found. Excavation shall include:
PREPARATION FOR SUBGRADES FOR PAVING, ROADWORKS AND LANDSCAPING. EXCAVATION FOR FOOTINGS, INCLUDING STRIPS, BEAMS, PADS AND SLABS. TRENCHES FOR SERVICES. EXCAVATION FOR BASEMENTS AND BELOW GROUND STRUCTURES. REMOVAL OF EXISTING FOOTINGS, BASEMENTS, SERVICES AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS DISCOVERED DURING REQUIRED EXCAVATION.
Other than materials approved for re-use for redistribution or filing, excavated material shall become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site to a legal disposal location. Set out work and verify before commencing. excavations shall not be larger than required for placing and removal of concrete formwork, bracing or other required support, installation and inspection of services. ensure sufficient working space at tops and bottoms of slopes. Take into account settlement and compaction, Provide sloped sides to open excavations, and stabilised excavated surfaces by approved procedures where indicated or required. Provide vertical sides for footings where practical. provide bracing as required to ensure sides are stable and safe at all times.
BB.45
SAFETY AND SUSPENSION OF WORK:
Excavation procedures shall ensure the safety of site personnel and the general public at all times. provide barricades and hoardings as required. in the event of slippage, stop work in the area of the slip and take remedial action immediately. Prevent surface water and water from other operations discharging or remaining on or near the top edges. carry out procedures to prevent erosion. KEEP EXCAVATIONS CLEAN AND FREE FROM LOOSE AND FALLEN MATERIALS. Suspend groundworks during inclement weather which would result in unsatisfactory work or dangerous conditions. carry out work in sequences which will minimise risk damage due to inclement weather.
BB.46
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADE SECTIONS:
Coordinate with other trade sections and separate contractors on site during excavation work to ensure the safety of site personnel and prevent delay to the works.
BB.47
BEARING SURFACES:
Provide sound, level bearing surfaces for footings. construct stepped bearing surfaces as required for level changes of footings. where footings bear on rock, scabble the rock face to give level bearings surface. If the bearing surface deteriorate after approval because of water or other cause, excavate further to a sound surface before placing the loadbearing element, and obtaining re-approval.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 13 of 13
EXCAVATION BB.48
OVER-EXCAVATION AND REINSTATEMENT:
Where excavation exceeds the required depth for any reason, including removal of bad ground, reinstate excavation to correct depth and required bearing value by approved procedures including: Selected back-filing compacted to the required density to match adjacent ground. Blinding concrete of strength to match the structural element, but not kess than 15mpa. No claim for additional cost or extension of time will be approved for additional back-filing, compacting or testing due to over-excavation.
BB.49
ROCK REMOVAL
EXCAVATE AND REMOVE ALL ROCK DISCOVERED IN EXCAVATIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST.
BB.50
BAD/CONTAMINATED GROUND
Excavate bad or contaminated ground by procedures approved by the relevant authority and remove to legal disposal location. Notify of bad or contaminated ground is discovered during excavation, or oft, wet and unstable areas occur during excavation. comply with the relevant codes. AS 4482 SOIL.
GUIDE TO SAMPLING AND INVESTIGATION OF POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED
Bad ground shall mean ground unsuitable for the purpose of the work, including ground which may subside, which contains cavities, faults or fissures, or contaminated by harmful substances including oil, cement and chemicals. Bad ground shall also mean ground which is or becomes soft, wet and unstable. Proof roll excavations as required to determine the extent of unsuitable materials. Replace bad or contaminated ground with approved fill materials and compact to 90% standard modified compaction before back-filing. If the excavated subgrade is unable to support required loads or enable compaction due only to high moisture content, carry out one or more of the following: Enable subgrade to dry sufficiently to support loads and for compaction. Excavate and remove the affected material, and back-fill excavated are4as. Scarify subgrade to assist drying, and re-compact when moisture content is satisfactory.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 5
SITEWORKS AND DRAINAGE CONTENTS
C.
SITEWORKS....................................................................................................... 2 C.1 PUBLIC STREETS AND FOOTPATHS ....................................................... 2 C.2 GENERALLY ............................................................................................... 2 C.3 TERMITE CONTROL ................................................................................... 2 C.4 TERMITE PROTECTION ............................................................................. 2 C.5 STANDARDS ............................................................................................... 2 C.6 CROSSINGS ............................................................................................... 2 C.7 KERBS, KERB AND CHANNELS AND V-CHANNELS ............................... 3 C.8 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................. 3 C.9 MATERIALS AND DRAINAGE GENERALLY ............................................... 4 C.10 STORMWATER DRAINS ............................................................................. 5 C.11 SEWERAGE ................................................................................................ 5
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 5
SITEWORKS AND DRAINAGE C.
SITEWORKS
C.1
PUBLIC STREETS AND FOOTPATHS
Do not close or obstruct any street or footpath unless required by the Contract Documents and in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Statutory Authorities. Conduct operations to minimize interference with the ordinary use made of adjacent roads, driveways, and footpaths or other facilities. Make all necessary arrangements with the relevant statutory authorities for the ingress and egress from the Site of labour and materials. Keep all public roadways and paving clear of mud and debris by washing or sweeping. Provide new/make good existing paving and footpath as required by the Municipal Authority. Refer Hydraulics drawings and specification for construction of new Gatic Multi-Part cover with beam supports to Ramp. Provide waterproofing with Gatic Sealant compound.
C.2
GENERALLY
Plan and carry out the work so as to avoid erosion, contamination, and sedimentation of the site, surrounding areas, and drainage systems. Include any Local Authority site management requirements.
C.3
TERMITE CONTROL
The soil under proposed new building shall, if required by the Building Surveyor, be chemically treated to protect the building against subterranean termites. On completion of treatment the Contractor shall furnish a certificate in accordance with AS 2057 and AS 3660. Preferred sub-contractor shall be TermiMesh. Provide a minimum 10 year warranty against infestation by termites.
C.4
TERMITE PROTECTION
Remove all traces of timber, branches and other vegetable matter in the areas to be covered with concrete paving and/or by proposed building. Refer to AS 3660.1 for installation of a chemical soil barrier using a chemical approved by the National Registration Authority for Agriculture and Veterinary Chemicals for use as a termite barrier. Installation shall be done by a specialist contractor, who shall submit a 2 year plan for inspections of the barrier to be carried out on a frequency consistent with the activity level of the termites found in the locality. Submit certificates in accordance with AS 3660 at each stage of treatment including a certificate of completion.
C.5
STANDARDS
The following AS Standards shall apply: AS 2890
C.6
Parking Facilities Car Parking; Off-Street Parking for People with Disabilities
CROSSINGS
Construct new crossings as shown on drawings and to conform to the requirements of the Municipal Authority. Make good to all street channels, kerbs, footpaths, services lawns and other things affected by this work.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 5
SITEWORKS AND DRAINAGE C.7
KERBS, KERB AND CHANNELS AND V-CHANNELS
Concrete compressive strength shall be 20 MPa at 28 days. Formwork shall be true, straight and leakproof. Bottom of excavation shall allow for thickness of bedding material. Remove any soft or unstable areas and backfill with approved compacted material. Place approved templates into grooved of forms to form contraction joints extending through half the thickness of the concrete. Joint spacing shall be not more than 3000 mm centres. The template shall be made of steel and accurately represent the profile of the section. All form faces shall be coated with approved oil. All exposed surfaces shall be finished true and straight and a steel trowel shall be used to achieve a smooth finish. All exposed edges and joints shall be neatly rounded off with an approved tool. Place fill compacted in layers not more than 150 mm between top of kerb to kerb level.
C.8 C8.1
EXCAVATION EXCAVATION FOR DRAINS
Excavate generally as described in Section "B" for all trenches for drains and sumps. Where necessary for the protection of workmen or the public, the Builder shall at his expense provide adequate support to ensure stability of the trench adjoining ground works or structures. All excavated materials shall be so placed as to cause the least possible obstruction to all persons having lawful access to site. Sewerage drains to be laid in a dry trench. The Builder shall take all precautions to prevent water from entering the trench. Should any trench become filled with water or in any way unusable, the Builder shall at his own expense carry out additional trenching or other remedial work which may be ordered. Where unstable trench bottoms are encountered, they shall be stabilised and brought back to correct level and grade by use of cement, concrete or other means as ordered by the Architect. All making good shall be carried out using materials as required to obtain a finish equal to and matching existing surrounding conditions.
C8.2
TRENCH EXCAVATION
Excavate to the lines, levels, and grades as required for underground services including drainage, hydraulic, gas and electric. Make the trenches straight between manholes, inspection pits, junctions and the like, with vertical side and uniform grades. Where required by the Relevant Authorities, provide under road boring, by an approved special subcontractor, in lieu of trenches. Make the bored dimensions slightly less than the relevant service pipe to ensure a tight fit. If voids are encountered, fill by pressure grouting. Excavation in excess of 1.5 m deep shall be supervised by persons holding a "Permit to Manage" issued by the Minerals & Energy Department. All excavations shall be backfilled with approved material at the Builder's expense. Type of backfill to be similar to backfill specified for trench. Compact to 100% of the Standard Maximum Dry Density. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 5
SITEWORKS AND DRAINAGE The Builder shall excavate soft wet and unstable material of depths exceeding 150 mm below the level of excavation required to provide the minimum specified thickness of pipe bedding and shall fill the resulting space. The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with approved material in layers to below pipe bedding level and compacted to approval.
C.9 C9.1
MATERIALS AND DRAINAGE GENERALLY DRAIN PIPES
Stormwater drains shall be : UPVC pipes and fittings Class Sewer Grade for solvent jointing to AS 1260. Sewerage drains shall be : Heavy UPVC pipes and fittings for sewerage applications complying with AS 1260. Solvent-welding cements for use with rigid UPVC pipes and fittings shall be of a distinctive colour and accordance with Water Industry Technical Standard.
C9.2
DRAIN JOINTING MATERIALS
Join UPVC pipes of stormwater and sewerage drainage with solvent-welding cements in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide a cast iron sleeve where drains pass through walls below ground level .
C9.3
LAYING
In setting out the general falls of the system ensure that the maximum falls are obtained. Make sure that invert is set to a true and even gradient. Start laying main drains at point of outfall and insert junctions as necessary for branch drains as the work proceeds. When main drains are completed, start laying branch drains from the junctions on the main drain. Bedding material shall be well compacted to produce a continuous support for the pipe barrels with recesses provided under sockets. The alignment shall be straight and pipes shall be laid with uniform gradients.
C9.4
TRENCH BACKFILL
Bedding material shall be used to fill recesses below sockets and up to centreline of drain between trench walls and drain. The initial backfill up to 300 mm above top of pipe shall be of select material. For UPVC pipes it shall be coarse sand. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled in layers not more than 150 mm thick and compacted to approval. The backfill shall be free of organic matter, topsoil rubbish and rocks with a dimension greater than 75 mm. Trenches under paved areas or future paved areas shall be backfilled with Class 2, 20 crushed rock compacted to approval.
C9.5
TESTING
Provide all necessary testing apparatus together with any other materials and labour that may be required for the complete and proper testing of the drains and connections. No drains, joints or connections shall be covered in until they have been properly tested and finally approved by the Architect and any Authority having jurisdiction over the work.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 5
SITEWORKS AND DRAINAGE C9.6 DRAINAGE PITS, TRENCHES AND SUMPS Drainage pits, trenches and sumps shall be built to the size, lines and levels shown on drawings and further instructions on site. Walls and bases of pits and sumps shall be constructed of 150 mm reinforced concrete with F72 mesh placed centrally. Covers shall be Gatic or similar manufacture of types recommended by the manufacturer. Pits greater than 1000 mm deep shall be provided with step irons at 300 mm centres.
C9.7 LAYING AND JOINTING The Builder shall check all proposed and existing inverts before the pipe laying commences. Pipe laying shall commence at the discharge end of the drain. Whilst being laid the trenches shall be free of water and properly drained.
C9.8
EXISTING DRAINS
Where existing drains can no longer be used Builder is to disconnect existing drains and seal up as directed. Insert into existing drains new length of pipe with branches as required to take connections from new drains. Clean out the existing drains which are to be reused and flush out with lime water.
C.10 STORMWATER DRAINS C10.1 GENERALLY Connection of outfall drains shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Local Authority. The Builder shall ascertain the location of existing services and if necessary liaise with the relevant Statutory Authorities. Pipe laying shall proceed upstream from the point of discharge and laid to the alignment and levels shown. Sockets shall be located upstream. The downpipes shall enter into the faucet end of the branch drain via PVC downpipe adaptor. The stormwater drainage installation shall be complete with all pipes, bends, junctions, branches, pits, jointing, bedding and other fittings and materials necessary for the satisfactory completion and performance of the system.
C.11 SEWERAGE C11.1
SEWERAGE PIPES
In case of rock bottom trenches or where directed the pipes shall be bedded upon mortar composed of one part cement to four parts sand with a thickness of not less than 50 mm below the barrel of the pipe. Where trenches have been excavated to a greater depth than necessary, such depth shall be made good with concrete or cement mortar before pipes are laid. All drains shall be laid complete with all necessary accessories, fittings and materials such as bends, inspection branches, junctions, traps etc., and necessary auxiliaries such as risers etc. to affect complete drain construction. All drains to be laid at regulation grade with straight alignment between changes of direction. Prior approval of the Sewerage Authority shall be obtained before construction of any drain at gradients less than those in Authorities Regulations. The drains shall be bedded on an 80 mm compacted depth of 6 mm minus bluestone, extending the full width of trench, and on each side of the pipe, to the level of the top of such pipe and fittings. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 9
CONCRETE CONTENTS
D.
CONCRETE .................................................................................................... 2 D.1 SCOPE OF WORKS .................................................................................. 2 D.2 SUPERVISION ........................................................................................... 2 D.4 WORK FOR SUBCONTRACTORS ............................................................. 2 D.5 TOLERANCE ............................................................................................... 2 D.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................. 2 D.7 CEMENT ...................................................................................................... 3 D.8 FINE AGGREGATE (NORMAL WEIGHT) ................................................... 3 D.9 COARSE AGGREGATE (NORMAL WEIGHT) ............................................ 3 D.10 WATER .................................................................................................... 3 D.11 ADMIXTURES .......................................................................................... 3 D.12 REINFORCEMENT - GENERALLY ......................................................... 3 D.13 MOISTUREPROOF MEMBRANE ............................................................ 3 D.14 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................... 4 D.15 READY MIXED CONCRETE.................................................................... 4 D.16 PROPORTIONING ................................................................................... 5 D.17 SAMPLING, TESTING, REJECTION AND RECTIFICATION .................. 5 D.18 PROTECTION AND CURING .................................................................. 5 D.19 SURFACE FINISHES TO SLABS ............................................................ 5 D.20 EMBEDDED ITEMS ................................................................................. 6 D.21 SUSPENDED SLABS .............................................................................. 6 D.22 PAVEMENTS ........................................................................................... 6 D.23 INSPECTIONS ......................................................................................... 6 D.24 FORMWORK GENERALLY ..................................................................... 7 D.25 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE .............................................................. 7 D.26 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................... 7 D.27 SLAB SURFACING .................................................................................. 7 D.28 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 7 D.29 CONCRETE SCREED ............................................................................. 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 9
CONCRETE D.
D.1
CONCRETE SCOPE OF WORKS
Refer also General Notes on structural drawings prepared by the Structural Consultant. Where a conflict arises between this Specification and General notes on structural drawings, the requirements of the General notes shall apply. All concrete work shall conform to the materials and workmanship requirements of the BCA and current Australian Standards. These standards shall include but not necessarily limited to. AS 3600 Concrete Structures Code AS 3610 Formwork for Concrete AS 3610 Supplement 1 & 2 AS 1012 Methods For the Testing of Concrete AS 1302 Steel Reinforcing Bars for Concrete AS 1304 Welded Wire Reinforcing Fabric for Concrete AS 2350 Portland Cement AS 1379 Ready Mixed Concrete Supply, transport and place all concrete required for the work strictly in accordance with the strengths and other requirements shown on the drawings, this Specification and the current SAA Codes.
D.2
SUPERVISION
Employ on the site during all stages of the concrete work a capable foreman competent to supervise the work and maintain the standards specified. All recording documents shall be kept on site and available for inspection by the Superintendent at any time during the currency of the Contract.
D.4
WORK FOR SUBCONTRACTORS
Build in fillets, fastenings, bolts, sleeves, etc. and form all holes, recesses and chases required whether or not specifically shown on the drawings or stated in this Specification. Provide set-down for Cool oom.
D.5
TOLERANCE
The work shall be carefully and accurately set out, true to the positions, levels, slopes and dimensions shown on drawings, but the tolerances must not be exceeded in the finished structural concrete listed in accordance with AS 3600 and AS 3610.
D.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Supply and install required materials in compliance with Drawings and Specifications which form part of this Contract and with further details and/or instructions issued during the currency of the Contract. The Concreter is to be experienced in all types of concrete work in this project and provide an appropriately qualified Foremen to supervise requirements. Several concreters may be used if necessary to obtain the appropriate experience in the various types of work.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 9
CONCRETE D.7
CEMENT
For all concrete use fresh, cool Portland cement of approved local manufacture, supplied direct from the manufacturer to the pre-mixing plant. Cement shall be Type A conforming to AS 2350. Cement delivered to the site shall be in branded and sealed bags, stacked under protective cover and stored to prevent deterioration.
D.8
FINE AGGREGATE (NORMAL WEIGHT)
Fine aggregate shall be clean, hard natural sand and stone which shall conform with the requirements of AS 2758.1 The grading shall conform with AS 2758.1
D.9
COARSE AGGREGATE (NORMAL WEIGHT)
Coarse aggregate shall be clean, hard crushed stone or hard crushed natural river gravel which shall conform with the requirements of AS 2758.1 The grading shall conform with AS 2758.1 and the maximum size of course aggregate shall be 20 mm
D.10
WATER
Water shall be fresh and clean, free from impurities, and fit for human consumption.
D.11
ADMIXTURES
No admixture shall be added to the concrete unless approved in writing by the Superintendent.
D.12
REINFORCEMENT - GENERALLY
All Reinforcement : supplied, fabricated and fixed in accordance with the Drawings and this Specification. Refer discrepancies to the Engineer for decision before proceeding with the work. reinforcing steel. Remove reinforcement which does not comply with the requirements of this Specification and replace to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Ensure that reinforcing is free from loose mill scale, rust, mud, oil, grease or other non-metallic coatings which would reduce the bond between the concrete and steel and is free from kinks or other defects, at the time of placing concrete. When there is a delay between placing the reinforcement and pouring the concrete, the Engineer may require the Contractor to restore the reinforcement to a condition satisfactory to receive concrete.
D.13
MOISTUREPROOF MEMBRANE
Lay Fortecon super heavy duty moistureproof polythene film after site preparation and prior to laying reinforcing mesh in order to give a watertight seal under and around the concrete slab on ground or on fill. All loose and wet ground shall be removed and all low spots filled. On the prepared surface lay 50 mm thick compacted packing sand. Sand shall be close to optimum moisture content when compacted and shall be compacted not less than 95% Relative density test No.11.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 9
CONCRETE The membrane shall be 0.20 mm thick orange coloured polythene moistureproof membrane manufactured from XDG33. Lap joints in membrane 300 mm and seal the lap with 50 mm wide pressure sensitive waterproof polythene or PVC tape. All laps shall be faced away from the direction of the pour. Any laps must run vertically to avoid pulling of taped joints. All joints shall be lapped and taped and sufficient slack allowed to avoid either pulling taped joints or forming void behind the underlay. Seal all pipes, ducts etc. where these penetrate the membrane, by wrapping a suitable piece polythene into cone shape around the pipe, etc. Seal the top of cone to the pipe and the base of the cone to the main barrier with tape. Allow sufficient slack to avoid pulling of taped joints.
D.14
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Generally construct joints where shown on Structural drawings. Joints not shown on the drawings shall be subject to the prior approval of the Superintendent. They shall be so made and located as least to impair the strength of the structure. Make joints at right angles to main reinforcement.
D.15
READY MIXED CONCRETE
All concrete shall be ready mixed from a supply company approved by the Superintendent and delivered to the project in accordance with AS 1379 except as varied by the specification. Concrete mix designs shall be submitted to the Superintendent in accordance with this specification and two (2) weeks prior to the placement of any concrete. Concrete shall be mixed in an approved central plant and transported to the site in a pre-mixed condition of specially constructed agitating transit mixers. When ordering ready mixed concrete the Contractor shall give the following information and instructions to the concrete supplier: Type and specification of Portland Cement Slump The maximum size of aggregate Admixtures The characteristic compressive strength The quantity required The structural element of the building being poured That the ordered strength and slump are those required at the form That non-agitating trucks will not be permitted. The ready mixed concrete supplier shall furnish duplicate delivery dockets with each load of concrete delivered to the project. The delivery tickets shall indicate: The delivery date and time dispatched Name and location of project Name of Contractor and Supplier Truck number Number of cubic metres in load Cement content per cubic metre Type and name of cement Admixtures, if any Maximum size of aggregate and ordered strength Slump at the form. The maximum slump loss during transportation from the central mixing plant to the site of the work shall not exceed 25 mm. If this limit cannot be met then the problem shall be referred to the Superintendent who may vary this requirement.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 9
CONCRETE The Contractor shall organize the delivery of concrete to the site in such quantities as can be efficiently handled by the labour available at the site without undue delay in the discharging of the concrete from the delivery vehicles. The Contractor shall ensure that the supplier of the ready mixed concrete will permit inspection of the Plant and materials and if so required, will permit the taking of samples fore testing purposes.
D.16
PROPORTIONING
Concrete shall be made with Portland cement, coarse dense aggregate, fine aggregate, water and any admixtures that may be specified or approved. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for producing the concrete which will have the properties specified. The Characteristic Compressive Strength of the concrete required for the various parts of the work shall be as shown on the drawings. The strength will be based on the characteristic compressive strength of standard cylinders at the age of 28 days as specified elsewhere. The mix parts by weight are to be determined by the Contractor for the various types of concrete to be used prior to the commencement of concreting. The design of the concrete mix must conform to some recognised method in current use and be approved by the Superintendent. The proportioning shall be such as to ensure that the resultant concrete will be sound, dense, durable and of strength and other properties specified.
D.17
SAMPLING, TESTING, REJECTION AND RECTIFICATION
All concrete poured in the structural elements of the building shall be tested. All sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of AS 1012 and AS 3600 for Project Control Testing. The sampling, site treatment and testing of test cylinders shall be carried out in NATA registered laboratory independent of concrete supplier. Allow for the whole of the costs involved in sampling and testing. Test results to be forwarded to Engineer for approval.
D.18
PROTECTION AND CURING
Protect all concrete surfaces from the sun and drying winds and cure for at least 7 days after placing. Curing is to commence immediately the surface is sufficiently hard as not to be damaged. Curing shall be one of the following acceptable methods, approved by the Superintendent before placement commences : a) Cover completely with 40 mm of wet sand, waterproof paper, plastic sheeting or other approved covering material securely held in position. Ensure that the concrete surface under covering is kept continuously damp; b) Pond, or continuously sprinkle the surface with water. Intermittent curing such as spraying with water once a day will not be acceptable; Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period. Do not allow any traffic to pass over or materials to be deposited on any concrete during its curing period without taking precautions to prevent damage to the concrete.
D.19
SURFACE FINISHES TO SLABS
All surface finishes to slabs shall be monolithic unless specified otherwise. All shrinkage cracks in exposed areas shall be sealed with an approved and colour matched epoxy compound installed to manufacturer's specification.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 9
CONCRETE D.20
EMBEDDED ITEMS
The Contractor shall allow for building in all fittings, bolts and other fixings shown on the drawings or covered in this specification. Such items shall be located in the formwork and inspected by the Engineer before concreting. Where necessary, fixings shall be foam filled when cast in, to prevent concrete penetrating the fixing.
D.21
SUSPENDED SLABS
Suspended slabs include traditionally formed slabs. The concrete for the reinforced concrete floor slabs is to be placed so that the steel reinforcement and build in items are not disturbed. The concrete shall be compacted and cured as noted elsewhere. Screed concrete to profile shown on drawings. When concrete has almost set, commence trowelling with a power or wood float. The use of surface driers is strictly prohibited. Maximum variation in floor level to be plus or minus 10 mm of level over the entire area and at all times, within plus or minus 5 mm over any 3 m length. Form penetrations in slab as indicated on the drawings for services.
D.22
PAVEMENTS
Prepare sub-grade and base courses to pavement as specified on the Civil Drawings. The concrete for reinforced floor slabs is to be placed so that a water vapour membrane if provided is not punctured and the steel reinforcement is not disturbed. The concrete shall be composed and cured as note elsewhere. Screed concrete to profiles shown on drawings. When concrete has almost set commence trowelling with a power or wood float. The use of driers is strictly prohibited. Maximum variation in floor level to be plus or minus 10 mm of level over the entire area and at all times, within plus or minus 5 mm over any 3 m length. Build to falls specified on the civil drawings. Joints to pavements to be installed at locations and to detail noted on the civil drawings.
D.23
INSPECTIONS
The concrete works will be particularly inspected by the Engineer at the stages as follows: 1. Immediately before each pour of concrete is commenced. Be responsible for the formwork and the quality of the stripped concrete. Keep records of each pour of concrete showing the following: 1. Details and types of reinforced steel. 2. Date of pouring of concrete. 3. Area of structure where concrete placed. 4. Area of structure where tests taken. 5. Test results when available. Make these records available for inspection by the Engineer. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 9
CONCRETE D.24
FORMWORK GENERALLY
The formwork design, design certification, erection and erection certification shall be the total responsibility of the Contractor. Conform to the shape, lines, grades and dimensions of concrete as required by the drawing and construct of approved precast concrete, timber or metal, in which bolts and screws in contact with concrete are countersunk. Provide sufficient strength to the structure to carry the concrete without deflection. Tolerances of the concrete when stripped: in accordance with the appropriate Clause of AS 3610.
D.25
COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
Compact concrete by mechanical vibration to the maximum practicable density, free of air or stone pockets. Concrete not vibrated will be rejected. Have on site sufficient vibrators of an approved pattern and keep one spare vibrator to every two active vibrators. To avoid segregation, place concrete in position and then vibrate. "Travelling" concrete by use of vibrators is likely to produce segregation and is not permitted. Operate immersion type vibrators in a near-vertical position and insert and withdraw them slowly. Allow them to penetrate and revibrate the concrete in the upper portion of the underlying layer. Do not leave vibrators, when in action, lying unattended on formwork, reinforcing or in concrete. Keep vibrator heads clean and free of mud or other deleterious matter when inserted into the concrete. Vibrate concrete in layers not exceeding 450mm in thickness and avoid contact of the vibrating head with surfaces of the forms.
D.26
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Wherever the concrete has its initial set by reason of placing being stopped or delayed before completion of the portion of the work under construction the point of stopping shall be deemed a construction joint.
D.27
SLAB SURFACING
The concrete shall be struck off to the required levels and grades with straight-edge template or approved compacting screed. Where the formwork is cambered, the screeds shall be set to a similar camber to maintain the required slab thickness. Consolidation of slabs may be achieved by using vibrating bridge screeds, roller screeds or other approved methods. The concrete shall be a relatively dry mix and the surfaces not over-manipulated before commencement of finishing operations. Pre-setting cracks in slabs shall be worked out by troweling and the surfaces cured within three hours of final troweling. Refer Section G – Flooring and Tiling for concrete finish under tiles. Generally, screed slabs and tamp with grid tamper enough to raise a thin bed of mortar to surface. No "dusting" on wet surface will be permitted. Level and compact with motor-driven disk type compactor float. Immediately thereafter level and compact surface further with motor-driven trowel with flat-pitched blades. Crack control joints shall be cut at every 9000 mm at an angle and pre-formed neoprene rubber insert shall be used to fill 5 mm by 20 mm deep grooves. Apply sealer as scheduled below.
D.28
GENERALLY
All bonding agents, adhesives, admixtures for concrete and mortar sealers and mastics shall be of approved manufacture and approved prior to use.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 9
CONCRETE Apply the materials strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, covering preparations, placing, finishing and curing. Allow access to the job to the authorized technical representative of the firm at all times when additive materials are being applied. The technical representative shall not be authorized to give any instructions on the job, but may report to the Superintendent if, in his opinion, the products are not being applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Non-slip to concrete stairs etc.: Apply Sikafloor Diamonhard or similar Sika product to concrete floor surfaces including for dustproofing and hardening of concrete slab. Apply to clean, dry polished concrete free of oil, dirt and other foreign materials. Protective clear Coating: Aquron, SicaCure, Conproof Clear seal or similar approved. Apply to clean, dry concrete free of oil, dirt and other foreign materials. Curing Compound: Concrete surfaces shall be cured by a spray applied, water based acrylic, membrane forming compound such as SikaCure as manufactured by Sika Australia Pty Limited. Generally: Apply Sikafloor Duraseal to concrete floors where no tiling is required or specified. Apply by roller or sprayer in 2 coats. Off-Form Finish: Class 2
D.29
CONCRETE SCREED
Where required lay Sikafloor Level 25 cementitious self-smoothing sub-floor screed, applied manually or by pump to achieve flat substrate prior to the application of the floor finish. Sikafloor Level is a one component, versatile and durable, sub-floor cementitious screed which can be applied manually or by pump to achieve rapid, flat and economic substrate prior to the application of the floor finish. Sikafloor Level is a sub-floor cementitious screed for use as an underlayment for carpet, ceramic tiles and Sikafloor epoxy coating systems. SURFACE PREPARATION The surface must be clean and free from all traces of loose material, old coatings, curing membranes, release agents, laitance, oil and grease etc. Substrate compression strength should be at least 20MPa. Structurally unsound layers and surface containments must be mechanically removed. Captive shot blasting followed by vacuuming to remove dust is the preferred method for large areas. PRIMING Priming with Sikafloor- Primer is essential to ensure good adhesion and reduce air release from the substrate. Apply Sikafloor-Level 25 Primer by roller ensuring complete wetting out of the substrate. The primed substrate should be in a tacky condition at the time of applying the Sikafloor Level 25. For very porous substrates use Sikafloor 156 broadcast with 505 aggregate and allow to cure.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 9
CONCRETE MIXING Sikafloor Level 25 should be mixed using a drill and suitable paddle or a continuous mixer/pump such as a Putzmeister machine. To each 20kg bag of Sikafloor Level 25, add 4.2 litres of clean water and mix until a homogenous, self smoothing consistency is achieved. CURING Sikafloor Level 25 is self-curing, but as with all cementitious products in hot weather, take adequate measures to protect it from exposure to direct sunlight and hot winds. The application of curing membrane or water is not necessary.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 4
PRECAST CONCRETE CONTENTS
DD. PRECAST CONCRETE .................................................................................. 2 DD.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 2 DD.2 QUALITY .................................................................................................. 2 DD.3 PRECAST UNITS ..................................................................................... 3 DD.4 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 4
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 4
PRECAST CONCRETE
DD.
PRECAST CONCRETE
DD.1
GENERAL
DD.1.1
CROSS REFERENCES General Refer to the General requirements section. Related sections Refer to the following sections:
DD.1.2
>
STANDARDS Methods and equipment Tilt-up panels: To AS 3850.2. Precast members: To AS 3850.3.
DD.1.3
INTERPRETATION General Precast units: Concrete elements manufactured in other than their final position including elements manufactured on site such as tilt-up panels.
DD.2 DD.2.1
QUALITY CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS Subcontractors Submit name and contact details of proposed manufacturer of precast concrete units. Design Veneered construction: If veneered construction is proposed submit proposals. Shop drawings Submit shop drawings of precast units showing the proposed details for their design, manufacture, assembly, transport and installation, including the following: -
Project title and manufacturer's name.
-
Shape or profile drawings (submit these before fabrication of moulds and tooling).
-
Calculations showing method of complying with specified performance requirements.
-
Concrete mix and type of cement if special-class concrete.
-
Formwork type.
-
Surface finish class and surface treatment, if applicable.
-
Curing and protection methods.
-
Marking plan.
-
Equipment and methods for handling, transport and installation.
-
Calculated maximum loadings on lifting and bracing inserts and attachments.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
Page 3 of 4
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
PRECAST CONCRETE -
Evidence of load capacity of lifting and bracing inserts and attachments in the form of test reports or calculations.
Lifting Early lifting: If it is proposed to lift the units by their designated lifting points before 28 day strength has been achieved, submit evidence to demonstrate that the unit is strong enough to carry its own weight without residual deflection on removal of the suspension. Attachments for handling purposes: If it is proposed to locate these on visible faces of units, submit proposals. Lifting units: If it is proposed to lift or support units at other than specified points, submit proposals. DD.2.2
PROTOTYPES Storage Maintain prototypes on site, undamaged and protected from discolouration for comparison with manufactured precast units. Performance testing Test each prototype for the specified properties. Structural testing Static load tests: If structural performance requirements are specified for the precast unit, perform static load tests on the prototype. Standard: To AS 3600. Additional tests: Static load tests may be required on panels which fail to meet specific acceptance criteria for structural performance. Test panels Make separate test panels for surface finish, colour, or both. Prototypes schedule Unit type
DD.3
PRECAST UNITS
DD.3.1
PRECAST UNITS Marking Identify units by marks which
Number of prototypes
-
remain legible until after the unit has been fixed in place;
-
are not visible in the completed structure;
-
show the date of casting;
-
show the correct orientation of the unit; and
-
on other than units manufactured as a standard product, indicate the locations within the structure in accordance with the marking plan.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 4
PRECAST CONCRETE Structural performance requirements > Tolerances Fixings and embedded items in precast units: To AS 3610 and AS 3850.1 as applicable. Lifting devices Design each lifting device for a working load at least 1.65 times the maximum 4 times the maximum static load. Attachments Do not place lifting attachments, holes and other temporary fixings for handling purposes on visible faces of units. Recess lifting attachments such as ferrules, or other types of cast-in fixings, and provide plugs for sealing. DD.3.2
DD.4 DD.4.1
VENEERED CONSTRUCTION General Do not use veneered construction.
INSTALLATION HANDLING PRECAST UNITS General Fix the units securely and accurately in their final positions. Provide components and materials, including fasteners, braces, shims, jointing strips, sealant, flashings, grout and mortar. Precautions Do not lift or support units at other than designated points. Use handling methods which do not overstress, warp or damage the units. Attachments Remove temporary attachments after erection. Seal or otherwise make good residual recesses. Protection Protect the units against staining, discolouration and damage.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Page 1 of 6
CONTENTS
E.
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK ........................................................................ 2 E.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ 2 E.2 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................... 2 E.3 STANDARDS .............................................................................................. 2 E.4 SHOP DRAWINGS - GENERALLY ............................................................ 2 E.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................. 3 E.6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ........................................................... 3 E.7 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................ 3 E.8 FABRICATION ............................................................................................ 3 E.9 EXECUTION ............................................................................................... 3 E.10 ERECTION ................................................................................................. 4 E.11 GROUTING OF BASEPLATES .................................................................. 4 E.12 WELDING ................................................................................................... 4 E.13 CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................... 4 E.14 INSPECTION ON SITE ............................................................................... 4 E.15 ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................... 4 E.16 CLEANING.................................................................................................. 4 E.17 PROTECTIVE COATINGS ......................................................................... 4 E.18 PROTECTIVE COATINGS ......................................................................... 5 E.19 STANDARD HOT DIP GALVANIZED COATING (UPDATED STANDARDS) ............................................................................................ 5 E.20 COATING REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 5 E.21 HEAVY DUTY AFTER FABRICATION GALVANIZING (GALVANIZING AS SELF FINISH)............................................................. 5 E.22 COMPLETION ............................................................................................ 6
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
E.
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
E.1
INTRODUCTION
Page 2 of 6
These specification clauses shall apply in addition to the requirements as noted on Structural Drawings and Specification prepared by the Structural Engineer. Where a conflict arises between this specification and the requirements of the Drawings and specification, the Drawings and specification prepared by the Structural Engineer shall apply.
E.2
SCOPE OF WORKS
Execute construction of structural steelwork necessary to complete the Works as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
E.3
STANDARDS
The following AS standards shall apply: GENERALLY AS/NZS 1163: 2009 and AS/NZS 3679.1: 2010 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP AS 4100 SAA Steel Structures Code AS 1554 SAA Structural Welding Code SURFACE TREATMENT AS 1627 Code of practice for preparation and pre-treatment of metal surfaces PROTECTIVE COATING AS 3750 Paints for steel structures
E.4
SHOP DRAWINGS - GENERALLY
Shop drawings and as applicable other associated information shall be obtained and submitted as called for in sufficient time and instructed to allow for review, amendment and re-submission before stockpiling, fabrication or fixing is programmed to be completed. Prior to submitting any Shop Drawing a Schedule of Drawings and associated Samples and Prototypes shall be prepared and submitted, inclusive of allowances for submission, amendment and re-submission. Each Shop Drawing shall be submitted with: 3 (three) sets of prints. Initial Shop Drawings issued for the first time shall be clearly marked PRELIMINARY. Normal turnaround time for shop drawings shall be 14 days or 10 working days.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
E.5
Page 3 of 6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Do work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, which form part of this contract, and further details and/or instructions issued by the Superintendent during the currency of the works. Submit evidence of experience appropriate to the class of work required. Install under the direct supervision of a capable Foreman, experienced in the class of work under construction.
E.6
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Provide approved steel materials in the profiles, sizes and grades indicated on drawings in accordance with the relevant Codes. Submit manufacturer’s mill certificates for all steel products. Otherwise steel shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory to verify compliance with the chemical and mechanical properties of the required material grade.
E.7
WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship and finishes shall be as described in AS 4100 unless otherwise specified. Where work is exposed to view and forms part of the architectural treatment give special attention to the finish. Shearing, flame cutting and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately; sharp corners and rough edges shall be flared by grinding or other approved means and, where noted on the drawings, welds shall be made smooth to approval. Remove sharp edges and weld splatter from all sections to match the samples provided to the Superintendent.
E.8
FABRICATION
Unless otherwise specified fabricate as shown on the drawings as described in AS 4100. Do not commence until permission to use the relevant shop drawings has been received. Carry out and complete fabrication in the workshop. Site operations where necessary shall be placed in positions of easy access.
E.9
EXECUTION
Inspect site conditions both before fabrication and delivery of steel. Ensure that on delivery, materials can be directly installed. Report discrepancies immediately they are found and instruction obtained before continuing with the affected portion of the work. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK E.10
Page 4 of 6
ERECTION
Comply with the requirements of AS 4100 and Code of Practice for Safe Erection of Building Steelwork. Adopt an erection procedure such that members can be placed and fixed in position without distortion. Make safe, during erection, against wind and erection stresses and loading conditions, including those due to erection equipment. Allow for the cost of temporary erection bracing required and of the Engineer's requirements in connection with such bracing.
E.11
GROUTING OF BASEPLATES
Set plates to precise level at centre of footing for future baseplate placement - refer baseplate details on Structural Drawings Set plate in high strength mortar. After placement of column base plates, grout fill the void completely. Trim the grout on completion.
E.12
WELDING
Shop a Site welding to be done in accordance with AS 1554. Weld sizes as shown on the Structural Drawings. Welding to be done by qualified Welding Personnel in accordance with AS 1554.
E.13
CONNECTIONS
Connection end points shall be as detailed or in the absence of specific detail, in accordance with relevant codes, AISC Standardised Structural Connections and current good practice.
E.14
INSPECTION ON SITE
Advise Superintendent and / or Engineer when erected steel is ready for inspection.
E.15
ADJUSTMENTS
Following erection, adjust the installation as required by Engineer. Touch up abraded or missing paint areas and refer the next clause.
E.16
CLEANING
Clean the installed steelwork and touch up with zinc rich primer paint of matching colour. Ensure that the touch up paint is compatible with the factory applied material.
E.17
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
All steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scale, weld splatter and slag, oil, grease, paint, dirt and other contaminating materials which could inhibit bonding of protective coatings or cause deterioration in the steel and/or coatings. Coatings shall not be applied while surfaces are damp, greasy, dusty or otherwise unsuitable. Cleaning shall be performed as required, in accordance with the appropriate specification as AS 1627 parts 0-7 (inclusive) and as specified for the particular coating system used in accordance with AS 2311 and AS 2312. Defects uncovered by the cleaning processes shall be made good before the work proceeds further.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Page 5 of 6
Cut edges, corners, bolts and welds in completed steelwork shall be cleaned and spot primed before the full coating system is applied. Surface adjacent to shop or site welds shall be de-slagged, cleaned and coated immediately after inspection and approval, using the same type of coating as used for the general coating system.
E.18
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
Uncoated surfaces: Do not coat surfaces to be concrete encased or interfaces of connections using bolts designated as High tensile on the drawings. Paint steelwork not encased, unless otherwise specified or shown. Prime as specified in this Section. Subsequent coatings are specified in Painting. PRIMING: APPLICATION: Apply primer to clean dry surfaces as soon as possible after surface preparation and before the surface deteriorates. Shop prime all surfaces to be painted except parts to be field welded. Prime columns with encased bases to 25 mm below the top of the concrete. Prime on site to repair shop priming and to complete the coverage of the erected steelwork after bolting and welding. Primer and surface treatments shall be as follows: ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER: PREPARATION: Hand or power tool clean to Class 1, to AS 2312. PRIMER OF GREY COLOUR: Zinc chromate to AS K211 Type 2 or 3 and GPC-P-2 or 3. APPLICATION: Two coats to 70 micrometres minimum dry film thickness. HOT DIP GALVANIZING: Hot dip galvanized finish where specified on drawings is to be in accordance with the requirements of AS 1650 for surface preparation of sub strata, thickness of coating materials and workmanship.
E.19
STANDARD HOT DIP GALVANIZED COATING (UPDATED STANDARDS)
This specification covers after fabrication galvanised coating applied to general steel articles, structural sections, angles, channels, beams, columns, fabricated steel assemblies, fasteners, steel reinforcement and other steel components.
E.20
COATING REQUIREMENTS
The thickness of the galvanised coating shall confirm with above AS standards. The thickness of the galvanised coating shall be tested by the purchaser at the galvaniser’s works, using an approved magnetic measuring device.
E.21
HEAVY DUTY AFTER FABRICATION GALVANIZING (GALVANIZING AS SELF FINISH)
This specification refers to the standard of galvanising finish required when aesthetic appearance is needed, additional to the standard hot-dip galvanising The surface finish of the galvanised coating shall be free from runs, dags, spikes, uneven surfaces and roughness.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Page 6 of 6
The steel used for this purpose shall comply with AS 1594 -350 grade with silicon levels less than or equal to 0.04%. The type of top coat if any, should be stipulated to the galvanizer as this will determine the type of repair method used for the galvanised coating.
E.22
COMPLETION
Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the Superintendent.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 8
BLOCKLAYER CONTENTS
FF. BLOCKLAYER................................................................................................. 2 FF.1 EXTENT OF WORK ................................................................................. 2 FF.2 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 2 FF.3 SAMPLES ................................................................................................ 2 FF.4 TOLERANCES ......................................................................................... 2 FF.5 SHORING................................................................................................. 3 FF.6 CODES..................................................................................................... 3 FF.7 SCAFFOLDING ........................................................................................ 3 FF.8 FIRE RATING TESTS .............................................................................. 3 FF.9 CONCRETE BLOCKS .............................................................................. 3 FF.10 REINFORCED LINTEL BLOCKS ............................................................. 4 FF.11 MILD STEEL LINTELS ............................................................................. 4 FF.12 MORTARS ............................................................................................... 4 FF.13 VENTS IN EXTERNAL WALLS ................................................................ 4 FF.14 WALL TIES............................................................................................... 5 FF.15 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................. 5 FF.16 WATERPROOFING ................................................................................. 5 FF.17 HANDLING AND STORAGE .................................................................... 5 FF.18 LOCATION OF DAMP-PROOF COURSES ............................................. 5 FF.19 CONTROL JOINTS .................................................................................. 6 FF.20 SLIDING JOINTS IF ANY REQUIRED ..................................................... 6 FF.21 LAYING .................................................................................................... 6 FF.22 grout for core filling ................................................................................... 6 FF.23 JOINTS..................................................................................................... 7 FF.24 CAVITY WALLS IF ANY REQUIRED ....................................................... 7 FF.25 PARAPETS .............................................................................................. 7 FF.26 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................. 7 FF.27 BONDING AND TYING OF BLOCK WALLS ............................................ 7 FF.28 STABILITY ............................................................................................... 7 FF.29 PROTECTION .......................................................................................... 7 FF.30 REJECTED WORK .................................................................................. 7 FF.31 WATERPROOF COVERING.................................................................... 8 FF.32 DUCTS ..................................................................................................... 8 FF.33 ISOLATED SOLID BLOCKS ..................................................................... 8 FF.34 FRAME STRAPS ..................................................................................... 8 FF.35 CUTTING.................................................................................................. 8 FF.36 BUILDING IN FIXINGS............................................................................. 8 FF.37 CLEANING CONCRETE BLOCKS .......................................................... 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 8
BLOCKLAYER
FF.
BLOCKLAYER
FF.1
EXTENT OF WORK
Construct Boral manufacture Blockwork to masonry walls where shown on drawings. Maintain ‘Good Blocklaying Practice’ recommended by the Block manufacturer to prevent efflorescence and other defects. ALL STRUCTURAL DETAILING SHOWN ON DRAWINGS SHALL BE CHECKED AND APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION.
FF.2
GENERALLY
Provide all labour, materials and equipment necessary to execute the blockwork construction shown on drawings, including any obvious works required or whether or not such work is particularly specified, detailed or shown on the drawings. Make preparations and do all work necessary to receive and adjoin other work. Other trades shall furnish inserts, strips, bolts, anchors, etc., for their respective work, but these shall be installed by the Blocklayer.
FF.3
SAMPLES
Erect a sample panel of not less than 100 blocks under cover or otherwise protected from weather and other damage. When approved the standards exhibited by the panel with respect to colour uniformity and face work will be those to which the Contractor shall be required to adhere rigidly.
FF.4
TOLERANCES
Blockwork shall be built true and plumb within the following tolerances: a. Deviation from the position shown on plan of any blockwork of a building more than one storey in height. TOLERANCE:
15 mm
b. Deviation from vertical within a storey. TOLERANCE:
10 mm per 3 m height
c. Deviation from line in plan in any length up to 10 m TOLERANCE:
5 mm
d. Deviation from line in plan in any length over 10 m TOLERANCE:
10 mm total
e. Deviation of bed joint from horizontal in any length up to TOLERANCE:
5 mm
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
10 m
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 8
BLOCKLAYER f. Deviation of bed joint horizontal in any length over 10 m TOLERANCE:
10 mm total
g. Thickness of bed joint, cross joint or perpend TOLERANCE:
FF.5
plus minus 3 mm thickness specified
SHORING
Be responsible to see that adequate shoring is in place for all beams, lintels, etc. and shall ensure these shoring remains in place for 7 - 14 days.
FF.6
CODES
Blockwork shall comply with the following: AS 3700 Masonry code AS 1500 Concrete building blocks AS 3700-2001 Masonry structures Also HB 124-2005 Design and Construction of Concrete Masonry Buildings. and BORAL MASONRY DESIGN GUIDE BOOK 2 UPDATED OCTOBER 2007
FF.7
SCAFFOLDING
Provide scaffolding in strict compliance with the State Scaffolding Regulations such as will permit all block laying to be carried out without the need for overhead work.
FF.8
FIRE RATING TESTS
Fire resistance rating tests shall comply with Building Code of Australia. The Block Manufacturer shall on request produce evidence of a standard fire resistance test result to support his claim as to compliance with the requirements of this specification, or evidence of acceptance of the product by the responsible Building Authority for the Specific resistance rating claimed.
FF.9
CONCRETE BLOCKS
Concrete blocks shall be sound, dry, crack-free and adequately cured before delivery. Concrete blocks shall be modular standard grey standard natural concrete as described on drawings or Finishes Schedule of Boral Masonry, partition, standard, hollow and solid as shown on drawings and supplied with: 1. Corresponding fractional blocks for bond and closures and special control joint blocks; 2. Conduit blocks for horizontal and vertical conduits; 3. Lintel blocks for window and door heads. 4. Bond Beam, Corner, Squint, Special, Channel and Sill blocks. 5. Retaining blocks. 6. Other types of blocks shown on drawings or required for the Work.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 8
BLOCKLAYER All blocks shall conform to the requirements of current AS 3700 and shall be of uniform size, colour and texture and approved manufacture.
FF.10
REINFORCED LINTEL BLOCKS
Support blockwork over openings reinforced lintel blocks in accordance with Structural Engineer’s Table. Lintel blocks shall be reinforced with M.S. deformed bars in accordance with the following table: Reinforcing rods shall have standard 180o hook ends with 20 mm concrete cover. Reinforce blocks as detailed on the structural engineering drawings. Fill lintel blocks solid with 20 MPa concrete using 6.5 mm aggregate.
FF.11
MILD STEEL LINTELS
Mild steel lintels shall comply with the following : AS 1131 Dimensions of Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sections AS 1227 General Requirements for Quality of Structural Steel Mild steel sections used for the support of external blockwork shall be hot-dip galvanised after the completion of cutting, drilling and welding.
FF.12
MORTARS
One cubic metre of mortar will lay approximately 1000 units, shell bedded. Mortar materials shall conform with AS 3700: 1998 Clause 10.4
A cubic metre of M3 (normal) mortar shall consist of:
280 kg of GP Portland Cement; 100 kg of lime; 1.2 cubic metres of clean, sharp sand (to allow for bulking)
Mixed in 1 : 1 : 6 proportions.
A cubic metre of M4 (exposure grade) mortar shall consist of: 400 kg of GP Portland cement; 50 kg of lime; 1 cubic metre of clean, sharp sand. Mixed in 2 : 1 : 9 proportions
Methylcellulose water thickeners such as Dynex may be used in lieu of lime mixes. The proportions are 1 : 0 : 5 for M3 mortar and 1 : 0 : 4 for M4 mortar. Mortar shall be coloured to match the blocks where applicable.
FF.13
VENTS IN EXTERNAL WALLS
Vents in external walls shall be of approved manufacture pressed steel vents of 1.0 mm tight-coated galvanised steel of dimensions shown on drawings.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 8
BLOCKLAYER FF.14
WALL TIES
Ties for cavity walls shall be Abey: 4 mm thick stainless steel wire ties. Refer Wall details. Where blockwork abut concrete columns, ties shall be 300 mm x 25 mm wide x 1.6 mm thick stainless steel straps ramset fixed to concrete with ties spaced every 400 mm height of blockwork. Where blockwork abut steel columns ties shall be masonry flexible anchors, Brunswick Sales Pty Ltd or other approved manufacture. Wall ties separating walls between apartments/shops, reducing impact noise through wall shall be: Resilient wall ties Matrix Industries Pty Ltd manufacture.
FF.15
REINFORCEMENT
Horizontal reinforcement to concrete blockwork shall be galvanised ladder mesh as supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the blockwork.
FF.16
WATERPROOFING
Damp proof course material shall be super grade bituminous coated aluminium, manufactured by an approved firm and placed in the wall in an undamaged condition. Flush up the bed with mortar before placing damp-proof course. Place the material in the longest length possible and to full width of block wall. Where joint in damp-proof course are unavoidable provide a lap of at least 250 mm. Cavity flashings shall be super grade bituminous coated aluminium manufactured by an approved firm and placed in the wall in an undamaged condition. Flush up beds with mortar and build up with two course step down across the cavity from inside to outside. Weepholes shall be provided by inserting 6 mm rods of perpends and removing when mortar has taken set at approximately 1200 mm centres over straight damp course.
FF.17
HANDLING AND STORAGE
Be responsible for the careful handling, stacking and storage of blocks and allied materials. Loads tipped on the site or loads containing an abnormally high percentage of broken units will be rejected. Concrete blocks must be protected from wet weather and kept dry at all times during storage. Concrete blocks shall be stacked on planks off ground and in wet weather shall be covered with a tarpaulin or otherwise kept dry.
FF.18
LOCATION OF DAMP-PROOF COURSES
Lay bitumen coated aluminium 0.55 mm damp-proof courses full width of walls, including cavities, stepped as required and lapped full width at angles and 300 mm at joints, and in the following locations: To all upper floors above continuous shelf angles as detailed. To external walls at floor levels with inner skin one course above outer skin.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 8
BLOCKLAYER Over heads of windows or doors not protected above, and set one course higher on the inner skin than the outer. Under window sills across cavity. Below all copings. To parapets at roof flashing level carried down one level in cavity and through outer skin.
FF.19
CONTROL JOINTS
Form 15 mm wide control joints in concrete blockwork with special control joint blocks where shown on drawings and not more than 8000 mm centres (unless masonry is reinforced). Horizontal reinforcement must not pass through control joints unless provision is made for suitable slip joints. Keep joints clear of mortar as work proceeds. Fill to a depth at least 25 mm with a waterproof non-sagging oil based mastic of approved manufacture integrally coloured to match the wall and backed with a continuous strip of compressible butyl impregnated plastic foam, 50 mm wide before being compressed. Before applying the mastic, prime the joint surfaces as recommended by the mastic manufacturer.
FF.20
SLIDING JOINTS IF ANY REQUIRED
To control joints install to every second course, each skin, Masonry Flexible anchors MFA 3 expansion anchors, available from Brunswick Sales Pty Ltd.
FF.21
LAYING
Blocks shall be laid dry except in extremely hot dry weather when a light mist spray on the bonding surfaces prior to laying may be necessary to slow absorption of moisture out of the mortar. All block laying shall be of the highest possible standard in all respects. Lay out work to minimise cutting of blocks and use of odd joint sizes or bond. Set or embed in blockwork all anchors, bolts, sleeves, conduits and other items required by other trades. Cut block units by machine. Lay all concrete blocks with thickest shell section uppermost. Concrete blocks must not be wetted before laying. Build blockwork in stretcher bond. The vertical and all other joints shall be completely filled with mortar. Inner and outer skins of cavity walls shall be built at the same time and height. In building up walls they shall be kept to uniform heights, no part being carried up more than 900 mm above any part and shall be plumb and in line from top to bottom of wall. For all wall faces in face work provide a symmetrical bond pattern to the whole wall surface. For block veneer construction install masonry ties in accordance with BCA requirements. Unfinished masonry must be covered with plastic to keep rainwater out of cores. This can cause efflorescence.
FF.22
GROUT FOR CORE FILLING
Grout shall comply with AS 3700 Clause 10.7 and be 20 MPa strengh. A cubic metre of grout shall consist of 1.2 cubic of clean, sharp well-graded sand and a minimum cement content of 300 kg. If coarse aggregate is used, it should be a maximum of 10 mm and preferably round rather than crushed.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 8
BLOCKLAYER FF.23
JOINTS
Make all joints to concrete block walls flush and 10 mm wide. Strike off flush all joints to exposed face work and when partly set, compact with a suitable tool to give flush perpends and bed joints.
FF.24
CAVITY WALLS IF ANY REQUIRED
Build cavity walls with a cavity of width shown on drawings and bond skins together with metal ties as specified before at 686 mm horizontally and every 200 mm in height in height with centres staggered. Temporarily close cavities with a timber batten which shall be raised as the work proceeds. Clean off mortar droppings from all ties and leave out every fourth block above each damp course of flashing. Clean out the cavities through these openings as work proceeds and build in the blocks omitted. Unless otherwise detailed, fill cavities in external walling up to one course above ground level with concrete 10 MPa. Finish to surface splayed down to outer skin and leave open joints every fourth perpend to act as weepholes.
FF.25
PARAPETS
Build parapets to roof as detailed. Finish outer face of parapets in face work and leave backs ready for rendering.
FF.26
REINFORCEMENT
Reinforce all block walling with galvanised ladder mesh as specified before. Place in bed joints at least every 600 mm in height and above and below window, and other openings. Extend 600 mm each side of openings, lap at least 300 mm at splices and bend at corners.
FF.27
BONDING AND TYING OF BLOCK WALLS
Where interior block walls meet other walls, bond at every second course with proper block-bonded junctions, employing fractional blocks as necessary.
FF.28
STABILITY
Ensure that all the blockwork construction is securely braced and laterally supported at all times during the construction of the Works to prevent damage or collapse due to the effect of high winds, or any other cause.
FF.29
PROTECTION
All facework shall be protected against damage, discolouration, staining, and disfigurement resulting from mortar smears, concrete splashes, plaster or paint stains, mechanical damage and the like.
FF.30
REJECTED WORK
The Blockwork may be rejected if not satisfactory in construction, jointing, or general clean appearance, or where excessive efflorescence appears. All rejected work shall be demolished and rebuilt in new materials at the Contractor's expense, without any extension of the Contract time.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 8
BLOCKLAYER FF.31
WATERPROOF COVERING
Cover tops of concrete block structure with approved waterproof materials during inclement weather and overnight, both during construction and completion, to prevent penetration of moisture into blockwork. The appearance of efflorescence due to wetting of masonry materials shall be sufficient evidence for rejection of the work.
FF.32
DUCTS
Build ducts in blockwork to house plumbing and services where shown on drawings. Form all openings required for access to ducts and build in frames for access panels. Build ducts of sufficient size to take all pipes. Arrange set-out of pipes with respective Contractors so that each pipe is set at least 25 mm clear of walls and other pipes after lagging is complete over sockets.
FF.33
ISOLATED SOLID BLOCKS
Provide and build in solid blocks into walls of otherwise hollow construction, to provide sounder fixings in all positions where sanitary fixtures are fixed.
FF.34
FRAME STRAPS
At all abutments of blockwork with timber frames generally provide 25 mm wide x 1.6 mm thick galvanised steel straps 400 mm long overall, crimped and forked with 75 mm turnup, one to every 400 mm in height. Nail to side of frame with galvanised clouts and build into bed joints.
FF.35
CUTTING
Do all cutting, chasing and making good required by Subcontractors. Leave all openings required for ventilation ducts and build in trimmers. Cut blockwork to rake where required.
FF.36
BUILDING IN FIXINGS
Build in all fillets, plugs, bolts, ties, metal clamps, dowels, fasteners and fixings required by this or other trades, and make good. As work proceeds, build in window and door frames and other frames and fittings.
FF.37
CLEANING CONCRETE BLOCKS
Keep exposed blockwork clean at all times and remove excess mortar from joints as work proceeds. Clean down with stiff wire brushes and water only. Spirits of salt must not be used. Exposed walls shall be protected from damage during erection and cleaned on completion by suitable means. Concrete runs shall be removed with a stiff wire brush. Concrete and mortar stains on blockwork shall be allowed to dry before brushing down and washing on completion. Special attention is drawn to the need for the protection of blockwork during welding operation on the roof structure. Remove mortar stains by hand or if necessary by pressure cleaning or provide acid cleaning. Cleaning shall be done strictly in accordance with manufacture’s instructions. For efflorescence timber, clay, loam and other stain cleaning refer manufacturer’s recommendation.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 8
FLOORING & TILING CONTENTS
G.
FLOORING AND TILING ................................................................................ 2 G.1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS ............................................................................ 2 G.1.2 SAMPLES ............................................................................................ 2 G.1.3 SPARE TILES AND PAVERS .............................................................. 2 G.1.4 STANDARDS ....................................................................................... 2 G.1.5 PROGRAM........................................................................................... 3 G.1.6 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................... 3 G.2 MATERIALS................................................................................................ 3 G.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................ 3 G.3 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................ 3 G.3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................ 3 G.3.2 TOLERANCES ..................................................................................... 3 G.3.3 ACCEPTANCE..................................................................................... 3 G.3.4 LEVELS ............................................................................................... 3 G.3.5 QUALITY OF WORK ............................................................................ 4 G.3.6 PENETRATIONS ................................................................................. 4 G.3.7 PREPARATORY WORK ON WALLS .................................................. 4 G.4 SURFACING REQUIREMENTS TO CONCRETE SLABS.......................... 4 G.4.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 4 G.5 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS FOR FLOOR TILING ........................................................................................................ 5 G.5.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 5 G.6 FLOOR TILES............................................................................................. 5 G.6.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 5 G.6.2 ADHESIVES......................................................................................... 5 G.6.3 BACKGROUND PREPARATION ......................................................... 6 G.6.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM - GENERALLY ..................... 6 G.6.5 MOVEMENT JOINTS ........................................................................... 6 G.7 CERAMIC WALL TILES .............................................................................. 6 G.7.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 6 G.7.2 MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 7 G.7.3 BACKGROUND PREPARATION ......................................................... 7 G.8 DIVISIONS .................................................................................................. 7 G.8.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 7 G.8.2 BALCONY EDGING ............................................................................. 8 G.9 TACTILE INDICATORS AND NON-SLIP NOSINGS .................................. 8 G.9.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 8
FLOORING & TILING
G.
FLOORING AND TILING
G.1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
Refer Exterior and Interior finishes schedules. For Timber flooring refer Section “M” – Carpenter and Joiner. Ensure surfaces are slip-resistive in accordance with as 1428.1 Nata accreditation for slip resistance testing done by attar testing laboratory, shall comply with the following: Wet pendulum AS/NZS 3661.1 AS/NZS 4586 and AS.NZS 4663 Dry floor friction AS/NZS 4586 and AS/NZS 4663 Floor coverings shall be made flush to each other. For skirtings refer schedule of finishes and drawings. Erect a prototype of each type of flooring including margins, and wall tiling specified where directed on site, for the approval of the superintendent: Not less than 10 m2. Approved prototypes in appropriate locations may form part of the complete installation
G.1.2
SAMPLES
Samples of flooring materials shall be submitted to the superintendent for approval in sufficient time to permit ordering and delivery in conformity with the overall building program. The contractor shall check availability of stock prior to submitting samples and advise the superintendent accordingly.
G.1.3
SPARE TILES AND PAVERS
The Contractor shall obtain from the floor layer 5% of the total of each tile and paver laid and shall hand these tiles to the owner for use as future replacement tiles. Tiles shall be packed in boxes before handing over.
G.1.4
STANDARDS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS ARE REFERRED TO IN THIS SECTION: AS 1884 COVERINGS
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE LAYING OF RESILIENT SHEET AND TILE FLOOR
BS 1286
CLAY TILES FOR FLOORING
BS CP 202
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR TILE FLOORING AND SUB FLOORING
AS 3958
CERAMIC TILES
BS 6431
CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILES
AS 2358
ADHESIVES FOR CERAMIC WALL TILES AND MOSAICS
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 8
FLOORING & TILING BS 1281
GLAZED CERAMIC TILES AND TILE FITTINGS FOR INTERNAL WALLS
BS 5385
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR WALL TILING
BS CP 202
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR TILE FLOORING AND SLAB FLOORING
G.1.5
PROGRAM
Program floor finishing works so that dust problems arising from other trades are avoided. Generally, floor finishes shall not be applied until plastering is completed. Program other trades to allow sufficient time for correct moisture content to be obtained in all substrates to be covered.
G.1.6
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Provide a copy of typed recommendations from the manufacturer of various flooring materials for the correct maintenance of floor finishes.
G.2
MATERIALS
G.2.1
GENERAL
Materials not referred to in this section are specified later in clauses relating to the particular finish. Allow for all sundry materials and work required to satisfactorily complete the work.
G.3
WORKMANSHIP
G.3.1
GENERAL
all work shall be carried out by approved firms and tradesmen specializing and experienced in the various trades required. the contractor shall be responsible to provide background surfaces to receive the applied materials as shown. any paint, oil, grease or other substance liable to affect adhesion of applied finishes shall be cleaned off. all mortar droppings or other irregularities shall be removed, the surface made good and swept clean to provide level even surface except where required to be graded.
G.3.2
TOLERANCES
The finished surface of a floor covering shall be within plus or minus 3 mm of true plane and level over the whole area. Surface undulations shall be such that, when a straight edge of 3000 mm length is placed in any direction across any portion of the floor, the clear distance between the floor and straight edge at any point along its length shall not exceed 2 mm in 1000 mm length of straight edge. Floors in ‘wet areas’ shall be provided with floor outlets. Refer "hydraulics". Refer drawings.
G.3.3
ACCEPTANCE
The manufacturer and/or applicator of applied finishes shall inspect finished base floors and shall Notify the contractor in writing of any defects which shall be rectified by the contractor prior to commencement of finishes. The application of finishing materials shall be deemed to signify Acceptance by the applicator of the satisfactory condition of the substrate. Testing of moisture content in floors shall be in accordance with the current as code and shall be carried out by the applicator before commencing installation of materials requiring a dry substrate.
G.3.4
LEVELS
Unless otherwise indicated, ensure that all floor finishes are flush with the margins against which they abut, and with one another.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 8
FLOORING & TILING G.3.5
QUALITY OF WORK
Workmanship associated with the integral and applied finishes specified under this section shall be of the highest available standard throughout and this shall be in evidence over all visible finished surfaces. G.3.6
PENETRATIONS
Stop and seal all floor and wall penetrations using appropriate sealants and packing to achieve the fire rating required. All penetrations in floors shall be stopped in a manner as to provide permanent and totally waterproof barrier from floor to floor.
G.3.7
PREPARATORY WORK ON WALLS
Wall surfaces which are to receive applied finishes shall be dry, clean and free from loose particles, grease and other foreign matter.
G.4
SURFACING REQUIREMENTS TO CONCRETE SLABS
G.4.1
GENERALLY
A. SMOOTH SURFACE Smooth steel trowel finish shall be free from trowel marks, depressions, ridges and similar defects, set to true plane at the required levels and grades within permissible tolerances, and set down as necessary to accommodate the thicknesses of the required floor finishes or coverings below the required finished floor levels. If the surfaces are not smooth enough for a high quality smooth finish, the contractor shall carry out further preparation work as necessary to upgrade the quality of the surface to the required standard, including: Filling all holes and depressions and rough texture with an approved epoxy based filler and sanding off the excess to a smooth flush finish. Grinding off all ridges, high spots, and rough areas to a smooth flush finish. After completion of preparation work, the concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, including in all corners and recesses, removal all dust and other loose materials. The surfaces must be thoroughly clean and dry for application of the required finishes and/or installation or required coverings. B. MEDIUM SURFACE Medium floated finish, with hand floated finish in areas inaccessible to power floats - surfaces shall be set to true plane at the required levels and grades within permissible tolerances, and set down as necessary to accommodate the thicknesses of the required floor finishes or coverings below the required finished floor levels. All ridges, high spots, and rough areas shall be ground off to a flush finish. After completion of preparation work, the concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, including all corners and recesses, to completely remove all dust and other loose materials. The surfaces must be thoroughly clean and dry for application of required finishes and/or installation of required floor coverings. Medium smooth surfaces shall be provided in areas where any of the following floor finishes or coverings are required:
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 8
FLOORING & TILING C. KEYED SURFACES Surfaces for application of mortar beds, underscreeds, and topping finishes shall be sufficiently textured to ensure adequate key for bonding of the required floor finishes. Concrete surfaces shall be set true to plane at the required levels and set down as necessary to accommodate the thicknesses of the required floor finishes, including any underscreeds or mortar beds as applicable, below the required finished floor levels. The surfaces must be thoroughly clean and damp for application of specified floor materials. All free water shall be mopped up before placement of materials. Keyed surfaces shall be provided in areas where floor tiles laid on mortar beds. The aggregate shall be clean crushed bluestone and total quantity of water shall be between 530-600 litres per cubic metre of cement and shall be minimum to provide a workable mix of driest suitable consistency. The aggregate shall be clean crushed bluestone and total quantity of water shall be between 530-600 litres per cubic metre of cement and shall be minimum to provide a workable mix of driest suitable consistency.
G.5
EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS FOR FLOOR TILING
G.5.1
GENERALLY
Refer drawings for locations. Strip system shall be latham neoprene-x-pansion control loc strips of selected brass finish, manufactured with wire anchors designed to control floor opening of floor joints during expansion and contraction. Strips shall be laid to line up with joints in tiling. The strips shall have 22 mm x 6 mm wide neoprene trafficable wear surface as required for particular application. Colour to be selected. The contractor shall be responsible for protection of the finished work until the completion of the project. Immediately before handing over works at the date of practical completion of the contract, the rubber surface shall be polished again with a brush polishing machine.
G.6
FLOOR TILES
G.6.1
GENERALLY
Refer finishes schedules for description of tiles. Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Adhesives must comply with the requirements of the Australian Standard as 2358, 1990. Tile installation must conform to the requirements of the Australian Standards as 3958/1991. Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by a qualified tradesperson. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per australian standard as3958.1 (1991) and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for floor tiles and coverings scheduled.
G.6.2
ADHESIVES
REFER SECTION J – TANKING AND WATERPROOFING FOR ADHESIVES. Apply the materials strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, covering preparations, placing, finishing and curing.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 8
FLOORING & TILING G.6.3
BACKGROUND PREPARATION
Concrete substrate Surface should have a wood float finish. Allow at least 4 weeks for the concrete to dry and cure prior to waterproofing or tiling. The surface should be true a pitched to drains where required. Remove any concrete sealers or curing compounds from the surface e.g. chlorinated rubber, resin and wax sealers. Steel trowel finished concrete should either be acid etched or roughened by mechanical means to remove laitance and to provide a good "key" for waterproofing and tiling.
G.6.4
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM - GENERALLY
REFER SECTION J – TANKING AND WATERPROOFING Surface preparation The substrate to be treated with the membrane should be dry and without traces of residue or permanent dampness. Any surface defects should be made good and all protrusions which may pierce the membrane shall be removed. Outlets Ensure applicable outlets are fitted. Outlets shall have provision for sealing waterproofing to outlets without penetration of waterproofing. Size to suit downpipe and drainage requirements. Dressing to outlets Dress membrane into outlets in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Penetrations - flashings Ensure underflashing is fitted around the penetrating pipe, vent of the like, then dress underflashing to surrounding substrate.
G.6.5
MOVEMENT JOINTS
1. THE LOCATION OF MOVEMENT JOINTS MUST BE DECIDED AT THE DESIGN STAGE. 2. PROVIDE MOVEMENT JOINTS OVER CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS IN THE BACKGROUND AND FLOOR. 3. PROVIDE MOVEMENT JOINTS AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT BACKGROUND MATERIALS. 4. AT FIXTURES INTERRUPTING THE TILE SURFACE AND AT INTERNAL VERTICAL CORNERS. 5. AT PERIMETER OF WALLS, FLOOR AND DOORWAYS. 6. JOINTS SHALL GO RIGHT THROUGH THE TILE AND ADHESIVE BED TO THE BACKGROUND AND BE KEPT FREE FROM DIRT AND ADHESIVE DROPPINGS. 7. A MAXIMUM 5 METRE INTERVALS IN A GRID PATTERN. 8. THESE MOVEMENT JOINTS SHOULD BE NO WIDER THAN 6MM AND FILLED WITH A HIGH QUALITY FLEXIBLE SEALANT.
G.7
CERAMIC WALL TILES
G.7.1
GENERALLY
Application of wall shall be included to splashbacks. Tiles shall be laid by an approved experienced tile layer.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 8
FLOORING & TILING The Contractor shall be responsible for any defective work and for any tiles being drummy or falling from walls and shall make good any such work. He shall be responsible for eradication of any sweating or discolouration that may appear after laying and treat such affected areas until all blemishes are removed.
G.7.2
MATERIALS
Tiles shall be as nominated in finishes schedule, of selected colours, of uniform texture and shall be first quality throughout with sharp even arises and free from warps, cracks, chips and other irregularities. All round edge and round edge returns required shall be used to complete the work. All defective tiles shall be rejected. Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Tile installation must conform with the requirements of the australian standard as 3958/1991. Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per australian standard a.s. 3958.1 (1991). Splashback to Joinery Fitments – Kitchens shall be gloss glazed ceramic – mounted vertically in ‘stack’ format, each tile 15 mm x 145 mm supplied on sheet.
G.7.3
BACKGROUND PREPARATION
W.R. plasterboard to walls: Must be fixed according to the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All surfaces should be dry, clean from dust, grease, oil, and all forms of contamination. The location of movement joints must be decided at the design stage. Provide movement joints over expansion joints in the background. Provide movement joints at junctions between different background materials. At fixtures interrupting the tile surface and at internal vertical corners. At a maximum of 3.5 metre intervals for wall tiling. Joints shall go right through the tile and adhesive bed to the background and be kept free from dirt and adhesive droppings. Movement joints shall not be less than 6mm wide.
G.8
DIVISIONS
G.8.1
GENERALLY
Divisions shall be of finish stated on drawings and schedule of finishes or as directed. Divisions to different floor finishes shall be fixed generally at the internal corner of the door rebate. Divisions shall be lugged for secure fixing to sub-floor and suitably shaped to the superintendent's approval for bonding to the finished material where applicable. Junctions of floor tiles - exposed concrete shall be Latham neoprene-X-Pansion control loc strips. Junctions of Floor tiles - other floors Shall be made with natural anodised aluminium L-angle sized to suit floor finish thickness. Angle to be glued or screwed to sub-base with horizontal leg under tiles and covered with graded Ardit base feathered off over width of 100 mm. Junctions of tiles to other floor finishes to be flush. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 8
FLOORING & TILING G.8.2
BALCONY EDGING
Provide “balcony edge detail” as supplied by the Balcony Edge Detail Pty Ltd to every balcony edge as detailed, complete with weep holes, expansion foam, flexible sealant, edge detail and interlocking clip joins. Fascia or bull nosed tiles are not required. Finish – powdercoated to selected colour. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s details.
G.9
TACTILE INDICATORS AND NON-SLIP NOSINGS
G.9.1
GENERALLY
Where shown on drawings to front of Stairs provide ground surface tactile indicators for the orientation of people with visual impairments of pathfinder system Australia Pty Ltd telephone 9725 3993 or other approved manufacture. The system shall be supplied of selected colour, manufactured in thermoplastic polypropylene and shall comply with as 1428 and manufactured in ceramic tile or as scheduled. Non-slip nosings shall be Latham Safety or similar approved manufacture.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 4
CARPET CONTENTS
GG.
CARPET ......................................................................................................... 2 GG.1.1 CARPET .............................................................................................. 2 GG.1.2 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 2 GG.1.3 ACCEPTANCE..................................................................................... 2 GG.1.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .................................................... 2 GG.1.5 FIRE RESISTANCE ............................................................................. 2 GG.1.6 STATIC TENDENCY ............................................................................ 2 GG.1.7 INSECT RESISTANCE ........................................................................ 2 GG.1.8 ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE ............................................................... 2 GG.1.9 ELECTROSTATIC PROPENSITY ....................................................... 2 GG.1.10 UNDERLAY.......................................................................................... 2 GG.1.11 ADHESIVES......................................................................................... 3 GG.1.12 TAPES ................................................................................................. 3 GG.1.13 GRIPPER AND EDGE STRIP .............................................................. 3 GG.1.14 LAYING OF CARPET .......................................................................... 3 GG.1.15 PENETRATIONS ................................................................................. 3 GG.1.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .......................................................... 3 GG.1.17 COMPLETION ..................................................................................... 4
DCPM ARCHITECTS
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 4
CARPET GG.
CARPET
GG.1.1
CARPET
GG.1.2
GENERALLY
Refer Finishes Schedule – APARTMENTS for description of Carpet. Refer Finishes schedule for skirtings, architraves and cornices Carpet shall carry the Environmental Certification Scheme label. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide background surfaces to receive carpet. Any paint, oil, grease or other substance liable to affect adhesion of carpet shall be cleaned off. All mortar droppings or other irregularities shall be removed, the surface made good and swept clean to provide level and even surface. Where applicable lay Sikafloor Level 25 cementitious self-smoothing sub-floor screed, applied manually or by pump to achieve flat substrate prior to the application of the carpet floor finish.
GG.1.3
ACCEPTANCE
The Carpet Layer shall inspect finished base floors and notify the Contractor in writing of any defects which shall be rectified by the Contractor prior to commencement of finishes. the application of carpet shall be deemed to signify acceptance by the Carpet layer of satisfactory condition of the substrate. Testing of moisture content in concrete floors shall be in accordance with the current AS Code and shall be carried out by the Carpet Layer before commencing installation of materials requiring a dry substrate.
GG.1.4
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
GG.1.5
FIRE RESISTANCE
Carpet shall not exceed the indices specified when tested in accordance with AS 1530 .
GG.1.6
STATIC TENDENCY
Carpet shall be within the range of surface resistance specified in AS 2834.
GG.1.7
INSECT RESISTANCE
Provide carpets and underlays composed entirely of materials either inherently resistant to insect attack or treated against insect attack by application or insecticide.
GG.1.8
ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
Provide carpet that is within the range of surface resistance specified in AS 4155.6.
GG.1.9
ELECTROSTATIC PROPENSITY
Provide a maximum electrostatic propensity value for carpet of 2500 Volts at a relative humidity of 25%.
GG.1.10 UNDERLAY Shall be as scheduled and comply with BS 5808.
DCPM ARCHITECTS
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 4
CARPET GG.1.11 ADHESIVES Adhesives shall comply with AS 2455 and shall be as recommended by the carpet and accessory manufacturer, compatible with the floor covering material, and suitable for bonding it to the sub-floor. Heat bonding tapes shall be first quality glass fibre and cotton thermoplastic adhesives coated tape not less than 100 mm wide on a metal foil base and backed with silicon coated release paper. Apply heat-bonded tapes in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
GG.1.12 TAPES Generally: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer and First quality glass fibre and cotton thermoplastic adhesive coated tape not less than 100 mm wide on a metal foil base and backed with silicon coated release paper.
GG.1.13 GRIPPER AND EDGE STRIP Strip shall be 38 mm wide x 8 mm thick commercial grade plywood strip set with three rows of rust resistant angled pins of length appropriate to the carpet type. Provide at all edges except where edge strip is to be laid. Provide double gripper strips to edges where recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Edge strips shall be heavy duty edge strip appropriate to the floor covering type, capable where necessary of accommodating to the levels of two adjacent floor finishes and consisting of a metal moulding or extrusion with vinyl inserts. Colour shall be as selected.
GG.1.14 LAYING OF CARPET Comply with AS 2455. Lay carpet in continuous lengths without cross joins in the body of the area. Make unavoidable cross joins at doorways under the closed door. Obtain approval from the Superintendent of the proposed layout before commencing of laying of carpet. Lay a sample area at least 10m2 of each type of carpet, including underlay, accessories, and 3 metres of typical seam before the Work.
GG.1.15 PENETRATIONS Should penetrations through laid carpet be necessary for electrical, telephone or other outlets, cut the carpet either by cross cutting or by cutting rectangular or circular openings. Protect the carpet as necessary during the cutting of holes through the floor. Replace the cut carpet over the opening without any signs of fraying or other damage, and fix with a peel-up adhesive, or resew to approval.
GG.1.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Progressively clean the work by removing waste, excess materials, adhesive and the like. When the installation is complete, clean the carpet as necessary to remove extraneous matter, marks, soiling and the like and to lift the pile where appropriate.
DCPM ARCHITECTS
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 4
CARPET The Contractor shall be responsible for supply and laying of a protective cover to the whole of the carpeted area. Protective cover shall be approved polythene sheets, well taped at joints and adequately fastened at all perimeters. After completed areas have been accepted by the Superintendent, The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the protective cover until the date of Practical Completion. When directed by the Superintendent, the Contractor shall remove the protective cover and clear same off the site. Repair, replace and clean carpet, if required, on completion.
GG.1.17 COMPLETION Submit a maintenance manual containing a technical specification of the carpet installation and setting out the manufacturer’s recommendations, for its use, care and maintenance. Include the names and addresses of the suppliers and manufacturers of each component. Supply spare matching materials of each type, colour and design of carpet from the same batch for future replacement purposes
DCPM ARCHITECTS
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
Page 1 of 9
CONTENTS H. ROOFER ........................................................................................................ 2 H.1 SCOPE ....................................................................................................... 2 H.2 DESIGN FOR RAINFALL............................................................................ 2 H.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ...................................................................... 2 H.4 DATA SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................ 2 H.5 MANUALS................................................................................................... 3 H.6 STANDARDS .............................................................................................. 3 H.7 GUARANTEES ........................................................................................... 3 H.8 APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS ............................................................ 3 H.9 RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 3 H.10 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ....................................................................... 3 H.11 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST CORROSION AND COMPACTIBILITY...................................................................................... 3 H.12 CLEANING.................................................................................................. 4 H.13 WIND FORCES .......................................................................................... 4 H.14 ROOF INSULATION FOR METAL ROOFING ............................................ 4 H.15 METAL ROOF DECKING ........................................................................... 4 H.16 ROOF PLUMBING ...................................................................................... 6 H.17 PARAPET CAPPINGS ................................................................................ 6 H.18 DOWNPIPES .............................................................................................. 6 H.19 OPENINGS IN ROOF ................................................................................. 7 H.20 FLASHINGS................................................................................................ 7 H.21 ROOF FLASHINGS .................................................................................... 7 H.22 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PENETRATION ............................................ 7 H.23 ROOFING WALKWAY AND EQUIPMENT SCREEN ................................ 8 H.24 CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORING TO BALCONIES .................................. 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER H. H.1
Page 2 of 9
ROOFER SCOPE
The work specified in this section covers the supply and fixing of all required roof coverings and roof plumbing. Included: Roofing work shall include, but not be limited to the following: - BHP Colourbonded ULTRA steel deck low pitch roof coverings; - Roof plumbing, cappings, flashings and associated accessories, trim, horizontal and vertical overflows; - Plant screening shall be Sayfa manufacture. Comply with Code of Practice for safe work on roofs and provide safe access to the roof maintenance or provide anchorage points for fall arrest system as applicable. The system shall be Safemaster Height Safety System Telephone 1800 773 733 or other approved manufacture.
H.2
DESIGN FOR RAINFALL
The roof cladding design is based on a 100 year return period for local conditions; i.e. a rainfall intensity of 186 mm per hour over a five minute period.
H.3
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
As installed, the roofing system and associated work shall: - Remain intact and waterproof under the local or regional ambient conditions of wind loading and rainfall intensity specified in AS 1170.2, AS 1170.3, and AS 2180 respectively; - Provide adequate means of dealing with vapour pressure, condensation, corrosion and thermal movement; - Support the specified imposed loads and types of roof access without impairment of performance; and - Satisfy any other performance requirements specified. Wind pressure testing: Be responsible for additional wind pressure testing. Confirm the suitability of the cladding materials to be provided.
H.4
DATA SUBMISSIONS
Before roofing work commences, obtain and submit the following data: BHP Colourbonded ULTRA Manufacturer's data: The roofing materials manufacturer's published product data, including: Technical specifications; Recommendations for installation; Product warranties; Type test or factory test data; Safety line system. Testing authority's reports: Test reports certified by an independent testing authority showing compliance with the criteria of specified tests. Approval of installer: If the installation is not by the product manufacturer, and the manufacturer's warranty is conditional on his approval of the installer, the manufacturer's written approval of the specialist installing firm. Acceptance of substrate: The installing firm's written statement certifying that the roof structure or substrate is satisfactory to receive the installation.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
H.5
Page 3 of 9
MANUALS
On completion furnish two copies of a manual of BHP Colourbonded ULTRA recommendations from the roof manufacturer or supplier for the maintenance of the roofing system including, but not limited to, frequency of inspection and recommended methods of access, inspection, cleaning, repair and replacement, each copy printed or typewritten on A4 sized paper, neatly bound in protective covers.
H.6
STANDARDS
The following AS standards shall apply: AS 1903 AS 4859 AS 1170 AS 2179 AS 2180 AS 1891 AS 1819
H.7
Reflective foil laminate Materials for thermal insulation of buildings Loading Code for Wind Forces Metal rainwater goods - specification Metal rainwater goods - selection and installation WorkCover Code of Practices Safe Working on Roofs
GUARANTEES
Provide written and signed guarantee for the complete roof installation for the period of five (15) years including associated work such as flashings, gutters and downpipes etc. The guarantee shall state that the workmanship and materials are guaranteed against failure or unreasonable deterioration for the specified period and that any defects that may arise during that time will be made good without delay at the guarantor's expense.
H.8
APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS
Use only specialist subcontractors experienced in the installation of the roofing materials and systems specified.
H.9
RESPONSIBILITY
Commencement of the laying of any roofing or performance of any work specified in this section shall be deemed to be acceptance by the Contractor of the whole sub-structure upon which the materials and finishes are applied and the edges up to which they finish.
H.10
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Unload, handle and store materials so as to provide protection from damage, deterioration and staining. Store sheet metal in a clean and dry location to prevent moisture entering or condensing between sheets and components.
H.11
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST CORROSION AND COMPACTIBILITY
The greatest care shall be taken to prevent contact between incompatible metals which could lead to electrolysis and corrosion including contact between chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel. Separate dissimilar metals with Denso tape or similar heavy duty anti- electrolytic tape, bitumen impregnated fibre felt. Fix all metals with materials that are compatible with material fixed. Adjacent materials to roofing shall be electrolytically and chemically compatible with each other and shall not stain or contaminate and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent materials. Be responsible for the whole cost of re- instatement of all damage caused through inadequate separation of incompatible metals.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
H.12
Page 4 of 9
CLEANING
Remove all rubbish as it accumulates, sweep clean and remove all trimmings, off-cuts, nails and other surplus materials from roof areas, gutters, outlets etc. on completion ensuring no foreign material enters the downpipe and/or stormwater drain system.
H.13
WIND FORCES
All materials, supports and fixings shall be designed and installed to withstand pressure co-efficients and wind velocities as scheduled in accordance with AS 1170 Part 2, Loading Code for Wind Forces. Submit a written guarantee that the methods used for fixing steel roofing to roof framing are capable of withstanding wind velocities up to 100 km/h. The guarantee shall remain effective for a period of 5 years from Practical Completion during which period any defects occurring in fixings and any resultant damage occurring to internal and external surfaces and contents of the building shall be made good, at the Contractor's expense. The guarantee shall include associated work such as flashing and the like, and it shall cover leaks in or displacement of the roofing or both, due to faulty materials or workmanship. For the purpose of the guarantee, skylights shall be considered as an integral part of the roofing.
H.14
ROOF INSULATION FOR METAL ROOFING
FOIL INSULATION Sarking shall comply with AS/ANZ 4200 Parts 1 & 2 Foil insulation shall not be left exposed to the weather for long periods while the building is under construction, nor while still in rolls. Reflective insulation in roofs shall be Renfoil as manufactured by Renhurst Industries and installed with corrosion resistant fixings. Insulation shall be a medium weight fire-retardant, double sided reflective aluminium foil laminated membrane with anti-glare coating on one surface. Install insulation in long length and dish 50 mm between supports to form an air space and seal at all laps and junctions with a waterproof adhesive. Turn insulation down 50 mm into gutters. Repair insulation if damaged. INSULATING BLANKET Insulation shall comply with AS 3742. Provide Anticon, Bradford Insulation or other approved manufacture Roofing Blanket R3.5 made from glass wool, bonded with a thermosetting resin and manufactured with reinforced laminated Thermofoil adhered to one face. The insulation must be dry when installed and laid as the roofing sheets are fixed. Lay insulation with foil side down. Lay insulating blanket over "Aus Mesh 300" or similar approved galvanised wire safety mesh fixed to purlins. Fix with galvanised steel screws and allow slight sag to accommodate the insulation.
H.15
METAL ROOF DECKING
MATERIALS Metal roofing shall comply with AS 1562.1 The base material shall be cold roll steel coated with zincalume AZ150 to complying with AS 1397. and Colorbond finish of AZ150 and Dune colour.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
Page 5 of 9
Provide to roof area, over two or more spans, where shown on drawings, interlocking roof decking of : BHP Colourbonded ULTRA with base steel of G550 of 0.48 mm base metal thickness Accessories shall be as supplied and recommended by decking manufacturer. Special tools shall be obtained from decking manufacturer for stop- ending, rib closing, notching, and turn downs, etc. Refer manufacturer’s Spanning Tables, which includes resistance to wind pressure and light roof traffic, for thickness of material. Comply with AS 1562.1 Design and Installation of Sheet Roof and Wall Cladding and AS 4040.2 Resistance to Wind Pressure for Non-cyclonic Regions. Accessories shall be as supplied and recommended by roofing manufacturer. Special tools shall be obtained from decking manufacturer for stop- ending, rib closing, notching, and turndowns, etc. Install roofing and associated fittings and trims strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Proper provision shall be made for expansion of roofing materials and decking units shall be fixed against movement at their upper ends and allowed to slide in the remaining clips for temperature movement. Roofing units shall have each end of every length formed and prepared to ensure watertightness . Ridging shall have special plain-notched ridge capping folded at the centre and down the full depth of the ribs. Fix to each rib by pop riveting or as recommended by the manufacturer. Roof sheeting shall project a minimum of 50 mm into gutters with the maximum projection into gutter providing access for cleaning. Capping to barges shall be as provided by decking manufacturer to match and align with the eaves gutters. FIXING The whole of the steel tray roofing shall be securely fixed according to the manufacturer's recommendations based on positive and negative pressures anticipated from the Loading Code. Except where large penetrations occur, each slope of the roof shall be covered with continuous sheets of decking without laps. Lay roofing with each tray individually fixed to each support with concealed purpose made fixing. No fastenings shall penetrate decking units. Install decking and associated fittings and trims strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Proper provision shall be made for expansion of decking materials and decking units shall be fixed against movement at their upper ends and allowed to slide in the remaining clips for temperature movement. Decking units shall have each end of every length formed and prepared to ensure watertightness . Fix roofing clips to timber roof members in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Fixing system shall be inspected and approved by the Structural Engineer. Roof sheeting shall project a minimum of 50 mm into gutters with the maximum projection into gutter providing access for cleaning. Ridging shall have special plain notched ridge capping folded at the centre and down the full depth of the ribs. Fix to each rib by pop riveting or as recommended by the manufacturer.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
Page 6 of 9
Capping to barges shall be as provided by decking manufacturer to match and align with the eaves gutters. For further information refer to BLUESCOPE STEEL Building Products Telephone 9875 0444 or 1800 641 417 and 13 30 38 (For Ultra flashings)
H.16
ROOF PLUMBING
ROOFING WORKS The roof plumbing and rainwater systems referred to in this section shall be supplied and fixed by the contractor responsible for the roofing previously specified. BOX GUTTERS TO METAL DECKING ROOF Colourbonded ULTRA to box gutters: 0.8 mm thick Form required falls in bottom of box gutter, keep top edges level. Form sumps in box gutters colorbonded ULTA gathered to downpipes. Support box gutters on prefabricated Ultra zincalume folded channel hangers fixed to fall at 600 mm centres and lined with ULTRA zincalume sheets. Provide Expansion Joints in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
H.17
PARAPET CAPPINGS
Provide cappings of suitable girth colorbonded ULTRA 0.8 mm ULTRA . Cappings shall overhang vertical surface 12 mm each side and having 50 mm vertical faces and with bottom leg returned to provide stiffening to bottom edges. Top of capping shall fall slightly to roofing. All exposed fixings shall be of matching finish to capping material.
H.18
DOWNPIPES
Provide downpipes constructed with Colourbonded ULTRA steel jointed as for Lysaght instructions. Downpipes shall be of sizes shown on drawings. Support each length of downpipe individually so that no weight is carried down the stacks. Fit all necessary fittings and junctions, forming changes of direction with easy bends securely supported on brackets. Do not use mitre joints. Fix downpipes 25 mm clear of walls and connect at heads with outlets of gutters and at feet to rainwater drains. Carry out hydrostatic testing of each downpipe in stages for each two storey height for not less than two hours. Remedy defects and re-test if necessary. Provide necessary test apparatus. Provide test certificates prepared by an independent testing authority to shown that downpipes comply with relevant standards. Provide necessary accessories, including joints, bends, elbows, couplings, offsets, straps and the like, purpose-made if supplied as part of the gutter system. Provide where required removable access covers. Provide a removable watertight access cover at the foot of each stack and at each junction and bend and every second floor level. Make provision for thermal movement. Where shown or directed provide mineral fibre pipe insulation 50 mm thick spirally bound on with 1.5 mm wire at 150 mm pitch. For concrete penetrations by downpipes refer Section J – Tanking and Waterproofing.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER H.18.1
Page 7 of 9
ROOF ACCESS AND PROTECTION
Shall be Sayfa Systems manufacture Tel. 8727 9000 Design Ref. No. 7060 complete with all components and installed by an Accredited Sayfa Installer.
H.19
OPENINGS IN ROOF
Form all openings for pipes, vents, etc., passing through roof decking. Holes shall have adequate clearance to allow for temperature movement of roofing. Provide 100 mm high collars at least 25 mm greater in diameter than pipe or vent passing through. Collars shall have square aprons or soakers at least 100 mm wider than collar. Fix to decking with pop rivets and seal with silicone. Over flashing shall be 0.60 mm thick zincalume giving 75 mm lap, riveted and sealed to pipe or vent. Cowls, pipes and flues installed by the Mechanical Subcontractor shall have over-flashings supplied and installed by the Subcontractor. All fixings, flashings, collars and pipes and vents shall be constructed of material and finish matching the roofing.
H.20
FLASHINGS
Flash all roof junctions, adjoining buildings, upstands, abutments and projections through the roof. Form flashings to required shape. Mechanically preform, mould or prefabricate where possible. Notch, scribe, flute or dress down as necessary to follow profiles of adjacent surfaces. Rake to roof falls. Extend 100 mm beyond jambs of openings. Flashing material shall be as follows: Flashings and fixings shall be of colour and material matching to roofing.
H.21
ROOF FLASHINGS
Preformed flashings including baffle, counter flashings, weather strips etc. shall be made from like or compatible materials to roofing, supplied by roofing manufacturer and shall cover the sheets to a minimum of 100 mm. Provide all special flashings as shown on drawings and all special purpose made fixings and sundries necessary to provide a complete, secure and watertight roof. All flashings shall be in long lengths folded to slopes of roof, turned down to bottom of trays and accurately notched over ribs of units. Fixing to ribs shall be with monel metal pop rivets and sealant tags as recommended by the manufacturer. Ensure that all fastenings are colour matched to roofing.
H.22
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PENETRATION
Openings through standing rib roof deck for mechanical ductwork, flues, pipes and the like shall be included as part of the roofing work, including the formation to the sizes nominated by the Mechanical Services subcontractor, together with all necessary flashings, soakers, upstands and the like. The Mechanical Services subcontractor is responsible for the installation of all services and equipment passing through such penetrations, together with all overflashings in accordance with this specification. Mechanical Services drawings and specifications are available for inspection at Construction office. It is assumed that the Contractor has viewed these documents and has fully familiarised themselves as the full extent of these works. Failure to comply with this inspection will not be grounds for a Cost Variation.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
H.23
Page 8 of 9
ROOFING WALKWAY AND EQUIPMENT SCREEN
The Contractor shall provide Juralco Roof Walkway System incorporating Ampligrip aluminum grating where shown on drawings or directed on site. The walkway is to be powder coated and colour matched to the roof sheeting. The system shall be designed to meet the relevant requirements of AS 1657-1992. Safety lifeline: Safety static line is to be suitable for a safety harness attachment via fixed length lanyards. Plant Equipment Screen shall be Sayfa Systems manufacture. Provide Shop drawings.
H.24
CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORING TO BALCONIES
Construct Balconies in accordance with drawings. In preparation for floor tiling system on Posystruts , lay compressed fibro cement sheets 15 mm or 18 mm thick (according spacing of structural joists), lay concrete screed of approved thickness screed to falls shown on drawings, apply WATERPROOF MEMBRANE Wolfin as specied below , and lay flooring tiles. The WATERPROOF MEMBRANE shall be Wolfin S self-adhesive polyester/PVC sheet 1.8 mm thick together with a concealed fixing and finish detail system consisting of: 1. Wolfinsteel 0.6 mm zinc-galvanised steel, factory precoated with 0.8 mm thick membrane 2. Wolfin AF 6 cast-in extruded reglet profiles. All membrane junctions shall be homogenously welded – adhesive or tapes are not to be used for jointing nor detailing to pipes, penetrations, etc. Laying shall be only performed by applicators licensed by WMA and evidence of their licensed status is to be provided before the work commences. GUARANTEE The guarantee is to be a single point of responsibility; that is without distinction between materials and workmanship and be issued solely by Wolfin Membranes Australia Pty Ltd. No disclaimer on the grounds of nature of structure, environmental pollution, chemical deposit nor workmanship are acceptable. The guarantee period is to be 10 years from the date upon the Superintendent certifies that the membrane works are Practically Complete. The Guarantee is not to contain elements of ‘pro-rata’ cost sharing. TERMINATIONS All membrane terminations are to use WMA recommended details and are to be self sufficiently waterproof at each termination. PLINTHS Prior to pouring of concrete plinth lay down Geofabric material to the size of the plinth plus 30 mm all round. Over Geofabric lay loose-laid Wolfin IB membrane. Cover Wolfin IB with another layer of A64 Geofabric material.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH ROOFER
Page 9 of 9
SHOP DRAWINGS All details, which are not precisely as the standard details in the Instructions for Laying, are to be the subject of shop drawings prepared by WMA submitted by the Applicator for the approval of the Superintendent. The contractual responsibilities remain unchanged by such approval. Contact: Projex Group for Wolfin 02 8336 1666 Fax 02 8336 1670 O. da Silva 04 246 30605 Before commencement the Applicator is to coordinate with WMA to ensure the shop drawings are provided in adequate time for approval, allowing time for resubmission if needed. No variation to the Applicator’s price is to result from any shop drawing unless the detail is the result of a legitimate contract variation instructed by the Builder. INSPECTION WMA will conduct work in progress inspections at intervals agreed with the Applicator and the Contractor. Any directions/advice/modification drawings issued by WMA in consequence are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval and followed. On completion and in any event before covering up, the WMA Inspector is to be called to inspect the work. The Inspector will, if necessary, issue Defect notice to the Applicator with a copy to the builder. The Membrane Applicator is to comply with any such Notice and arrange re-inspection.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING J.
TANKING AND WATERPROOFING
J1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
Page 1 of 23
Work included under this heading shall include all labour, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to perform all operations of the Tanking and Waterproofing work of this section, complete, as shown on the drawings or specified therein. Work includes but is not necessarily to the following: 1. Examination all other sections for work related to those other sections and required to be included as work under this Section. 2. Submittals of manufacturer’s technical data, material specification and samples as applicable, for all products specified therein for the Superintendent’s review prior to start of work in this section. 3. Installation of the Work using the latest edition, AS 3740 – Waterproofing of Wet Areas 4. All materials shall be of the highest grade available, free from defects and imperfections, of recent manufacture and unused. Consult Architectural and Structural drawings and check them with work under this Section. Be responsible for coordination of the work with that of other trades.
Tanking material shall be Ardex as specified, or Sika or Mapei manufacture REFER TO DRAWINGS AND FINISHES SCHEDULES FOR INSTALLATION OF APPLICABLE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES. REFER ALSO SECTIONS G – TILER A
J.1.2 REFERENCES Comply with the current edition of relevant codes, including: AS 3740
Waterproofing wet areas within residential building.
Inspections: Give sufficient notice so the Superintendent may inspect significant stages of work, including: Substrates prepared and ready for the installation, before commencement. Work to be covered over, before covering. Commencement of required testing on site. Certification: Submit written certification for: Acceptance of substrates. Compliance of completed work. Manufacturer’s verification of correct selection and installation. Submit manufacturer’s standard construction details indicating relevant selections. If the actual conditions are not indicated in the standard data, submit addition shop drawings for the actual conditions. Include shop drawings for and indicate: Edge details, joints, side and end lapping, turn-ups, turn-downs. Membrane profiles, inside and outside corners, acceptable bending radius. Substrate profiles, conditions, moisture content. Penetrations. Drains.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 2 of 23
Maintenance manual: Submit a maintenance manual detailing the cleaning, operating, repairs and emergency procedures, sources of replacement components and replacement methods.
J.1.3 WARRANTIES Generally: Provide an approved warranty from Practical Completion for a period of 10 years for liquid applied membranes / 20 years for mechanical barrier membranes (the ‘warranty period’). Include manufacturer’s product warranties and site quality assurance records. Warranty conditions for membranes and tanking: 1. The warranty shall include specific provisions and terms for failure of, or due to, the following: 2. Failure of the membrane to exclude free water and moisture. 3. Damage due to penetration of free water and moisture. 4. Delamination and separation of the membrane from substrates. 5. Failure of the membrane to accommodate movement in the base-structure. 6. Failure of the membrane to withstand design loads and dislodgement due to wind. 7. Damage, perforation or deterioration due to contact or close proximity with chemical products in the substrates, adjacent materials or the environment generally.
J.1.4 FLASHINGS AND TRIM Build-in flashings to prevent or divert the entry of water, weather, smoke and vermin, as appropriate, in accordance with the relevant codes. Submit details. Flashings shall have adequate stiffness to retain shape and remain effective in all weather and wind conditions, substrate movements and differential movements between adjacent materials. Flashings shall be made of corrosion-resistant materials, with protective coatings as required, non contaminating and non-staining, and fixed to ensure separation of dissimilar materials. Include required mechanical fixings, sealants and trims, compatible with flashing materials, suited to the conditions. Fixings shall be corrosion proof, and fitted with waterproof gasket. Lap and seal flashings by approved methods and make neat junctions with adjacent work. Accurately scribe and mitre corners. Seal all laps and fixing penetrations. Where required, construct grooves, rebates and reglets in substrates, or coordinate with Trade Sections for adjacent work as required. Construct weepholes as required to divert moisture outside of the building envelope. Unless otherwise indicated, visible flashings shall match adjacent visible materials. Coordinate flashings and upstands for service penetrations with relevant Services Sections.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
J.2.1
Page 3 of 23
WATERPROOFING – MEMBRANE 1
APPLICATION:
WATERPROOFING & TILING OF EXTERNAL BALCONIES
PRODUCTS:
ARDEX WPM 265 WATER BASED PRIMER ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ARDEX X77 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE ARDEX FG 8 FLEXIBLE COLOURED GROUT ARDEX SE COLOURED SILICONE
MATERIALS The Waterproofing Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson in accordance with the Australian Standard A.S. 3740 (2004). “Waterproofing of Internal Wet Areas” Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Adhesives must comply with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 2358 (1990). Tile installation must conform with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). BACKGROUND PREPARATION SUBSTRATES (where applicable) Ensure that the Substrate is clean, free from loose materials, dirt, oil, grease and all forms of contamination. Remove any Concrete Sealers or Curing Compounds by mechanical means (e.g.:Scabbling Machine) from the surface. The Concrete Substrate should have a "woodfloat" finish or show a degree of porosity to ensure sufficient bonding of the Waterproofing Membrane. Dense Concrete Substrates should be roughened by mechanical means to remove laitance and to provide a good "key” prior to Priming and Waterproofing. Minimal Falls of 1:100 should be created in the Concrete Substrate prior to Waterproofing. Prime all Concrete Substrates thoroughly with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer prior to Waterproofing.
ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM is a rollable two part component liquid applied Waterproofing Membrane. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be treated with ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane should be dry and without traces of residue or permanent dampness. Any surface defects should be made good and all protrusions which may pierce the membrane shall be removed. MOVEMENT JOINTS Preparation of movement joints, which move in excess of 20%, is as follows: (a) Clean and fill the joints with ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone. (b) Apply the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the movement joints in conjunction with the reinforced Deckweb Matting; applying two coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 4 of 23
OUTLETS Ensure applicable Outlets are fitted. Outlets shall have provision for sealing waterproofing to outlets without penetration of waterproofing. Size to suit downpipe and drainage requirements. Dressing to Outlets Dress membrane into the Outlets as follows: - Prime both surfaces with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer as specified in "Priming" - clause and allow to dry. - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. PENETRATIONS - Flashings Ensure under flashing is fitted around the penetrating pipe, vent of the like, then dress under flashing to surrounding substrate as follows: - Prime both surfaces with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer as specified in "Priming" - clause and allow to dry. - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. - On completion of waterproof membrane installation, cover the under flashing with cover flashing firmly fitted and sealed to penetrating pipe, vent or the like. PRIMING Apply one liberal coat of ARDE WPM 265 Water Based Primer to all substrates to be waterproofed. Apply the Primer with Paint Roller or Paint Brush and is touch dry in approximately 20 minutes. TREATMENT TO CRACKS Small hairline surface shrinkage cracks can be filled by the first application of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. For cracks over 2mm Wide, the following preparation is required:- remove loose particles and clean thoroughly. Fill the crack with a ARDEX Neutral Cure Silicone. Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting in conjunction with the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the crack. COVING AREAS AND CORNERS IN INTERNAL WET AREAS Apply a 10mm bead of ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone in all coving areas, corners and floor wastes prior to the application of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush. Immediately roll out the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a second heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. Coving Areas Coving areas where the angle is filled with sand/cement mortar, does not need special treatment. Coving areas which are square (90o angle), must be treated as follows: 1) Apply one coat of the ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer. 2) Apply ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone to all internal Coving Areas. 3) Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 5 of 23
APPLICATION OF ARDEX WPM 002 2- PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM. Priming Apply one coat of the ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer to the surface with a paint roller or paint brush. Priming coat will dry in approximately 30 minutes depending on weather conditions. Mixing Mix 20kg of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Powder with 20 litres of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Liquid. Pour the Powder into the Liquid whilst continuously stirring the mixture with a low speed mechanical stirrer until it becomes a smooth paste, free from lumps and air pockets. The pot life of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane is approximately 2 hours at 23oC and 50%R.H. Application Two Coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane must be applied to ensure the correct thickness of 1.5mm is achieved. Apply the first coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint brush or paint roller over the area that has been primed. Apply it in different directions, to ensure complete coverage with no air bubbles. Second coat can be applied when first coat is dry enough to walk upon without unsettling the Membrane i.e:- approximately 1 hour. Apply second coat as per the first coat. The dried film should be approximately 1.5mm thick. Allow to dry completely for approximately 24 hours, depending on weather conditions before subjecting the membrane to foot traffic and tiling.
RECOMMENDED ADHESIVE SYSTEM Use ARDEX X77 Off-White Flexible Cement Based Adhesive for all Floor Tiling over the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane in this application. MIXING The mixing ratio of ARDEX X77 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE to WATER is approximately 6.5 Litres of WATER to 20kg ARDEX X77 Powder at 23oC. In hotter climatic conditions (high temperature and high humidity) increase the amount of Water to a wetter mix. (Approximately 7-7.5 litres per 20kg). Mix small proportions at a time by pouring the Powder into the Water continuously stirring the mix with a mechanical stirrer using a low speed drill, or by hand until it becomes a wet, smooth paste free from lumps. APPLICATION Apply the mixed ARDEX X77 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE using a 10x10x10mm (minimum size) notched trowel for the Internal Floor Tiling Application over the prepared existing Concrete Substrate. GROUTING For increased flexibility, greater internal strength and resistance to mould growth, use ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout. For hot weather conditions, or when porous bodied tiles are being used, it is advisable to pre-wet the joints prior to grouting to overcome any likelihood of colour variation when the product is drying in the joints. MIXING Mix 5kg of ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout with approximately One Litre of clean Water with a low speed stirrer or by hand to achieve a lump free, firm paste. The mix is now ready to be applied into the joints.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 6 of 23
APPLICATION Apply the wet ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixture with a suitable rubber squeegee and work into the joint. Grout will set quickly, so confine application and clean up of the grout to small areas at a time. Remove the remaining Grout off the tile surface with a damp sponge or cloth. Finally, buff tiles with a dry cloth to remove any remaining grout material.
EXPANSION JOINTS The location of Expansion Joints must be decided at the design stage. Provide Expansion Joints over existing Expansion Joints in the substrate. Provide Expansion Joints at junctions between different substrate materials. At fixtures interrupting the tile surface and at internal vertical corners. At perimeter of floor surface and doorways and at Wall /Floor junctions. At a maximum of 5 metre intervals in a grid pattern for Floor Tiling Applications. Expansion Joints shall go right through the tile and adhesive bed to the substrate and be kept free from dirt and adhesive droppings. Expansion Joints shall not be less than 6mm wide. Expansion Joints other than those protected by metal or plastic edging subject to traffic heavier than light pedestrian, should not be wider than 10mm. Seal all Perimeter Expansion Joints with a high quality flexible sealant such as ARDEX S.E. COLOURED SILICONE.
J.2.2
WATERPROOFING – MEMBRANE 2
APPLICATION:
ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY, WATERPROOFING & TILING OF EXTERNAL BALCONIES & TERRACES
PRODUCTS:
ARDEX MULTIPRIME ARDEX X56 ONE PART FLEXIBLE TILING ADHESIVE ARDEX DS 40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY SYSTEM ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ARDEX X77 ONE PART FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED TILING ADHESIVE ARDEX FG 8 GROUT MIXED WITH A.B.A. GROUT BOOSTER ARDEX SE COLOURED SILICONE
MATERIALS The Waterproofing Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson in accordance with the Australian Standard A.S. 3740 (2004). “Waterproofing of Internal Wet Areas” Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Adhesives must comply with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 2358 (1990). Tile installation must conform with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 7 of 23
Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). BACKGROUND PREPARATION CONCRETE AND OTHER SUBSTRATE (where applicable) Ensure that the external Substrate is clean, free from loose materials, dirt, oil, grease and all forms of contamination. Remove any Concrete Sealers or Curing Compounds by mechanical means (e.g.:Scabbling Machine) from the surface. Dense Concrete Substrates should be roughened by mechanical means to remove laitance and to provide a good "key” prior to Priming and Waterproofing. Minimal Falls of 1:100 should be created in the Concrete Substrate prior to the application of the A.B.A. Soundproof Underlay System. Prime the prepared Concrete Surface with ARDEX MULTIPRIME by Paint Roller or Paint Brush and allow to dry. ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING Use ARDEX X56 TILING ADHESIVE using a 3x3x3mm Notched Trowel for the installation of the ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING. MIXING The Adhesive mixing ratio is 6.75 Litres of clean Water to 15KG ARDEX X56 Tiling Adhesive at 23 C. Mix small proportions at a time by pouring the Powder into the clean Water and continuously stir the mix with a mechanical stirrer using a low speed, or by hand until it becomes a wet, smooth paste free from lumps. INSTALLATION Ensure that all Expansion Joints in the New Concrete Substrate are telegraphed though all layers to the tiled surface. Install a 10x5mm Foam Strip around all Perimeter Walls and Surface Protrusions to reduce sound transfer. Adhere the ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING to the prepared New Concrete Substrate applying the ARDEX X56 Tiling Adhesive with a 3x3x3mm Notched Trowel. Install the ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING with the fleece side down in a tight brick pattern and roll into the Tiling Adhesive using a Fluted Roller. Fill any gaps between the sheets using the Ardex Neutral Cured Sealant. ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM is a rollable two part component liquid applied Waterproofing Membrane. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. SURFACE PREPARATION The ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING surface to be treated with ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane should be dry and without traces of residue or permanent dampness. Any surface defects should be made good and all protrusions which may pierce the membrane shall be removed. MOVEMENT JOINTS Preparation of movement joints, which move in excess of 20%, is as follows: (a) Clean and fill the joints with ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone. (b) Apply the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the movement joints in conjunction with the reinforced Deckweb Matting; applying two coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 8 of 23
OUTLETS Ensure applicable Outlets are fitted. Outlets shall have provision for sealing waterproofing to outlets without penetration of waterproofing. Size to suit downpipe and drainage requirements. Dressing to Outlets Dress membrane into the Outlets as follows: - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. PENETRATIONS - Flashings Ensure under flashing is fitted around the penetrating pipe, vent of the like, then dress under flashing to surrounding substrate as follows: - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. - On completion of waterproof membrane installation, cover the under flashing with cover flashing firmly fitted and sealed to penetrating pipe, vent or the like. COVING AREAS AND CORNERS IN INTERNAL WET AREAS Apply a 10mm bead of ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone in all coving areas, corners and floor wastes prior to the application of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane Membrane by paint roller or paint brush. Immediately roll out the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a second heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. Coving Areas Coving areas where the angle is filled with sand/cement mortar, does not need special treatment. Coving areas which are square (90o angle), must be treated as follows: Apply ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone to all internal Coving Areas. Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane.
APPLICATION OF ARDEX WPM 002 2- PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM. Mixing Mix 20kg of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Powder with 20 litres of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Liquid. Pour the Powder into the Liquid whilst continuously stirring the mixture with a low speed mechanical stirrer until it becomes a smooth paste, free from lumps and air pockets. The pot life of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane is approximately 2 hours at 23oC and 50%R.H.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 9 of 23
Application Two Coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane must be applied to ensure the correct thickness of 1.5mm is achieved. Apply the first coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint brush or paint roller over the area that has been primed. Apply it in different directions, to ensure complete coverage with no air bubbles. Second coat can be applied when first coat is dry enough to walk upon without unsettling the Membrane i.e:- approximately 1 hour. Apply second coat as per the first coat. The dried film should be approximately 1.5mm thick. Allow to dry completely for approximately 24 hours, depending on weather conditions before subjecting the membrane to foot traffic and tiling.
INSTALLATION OF THE CERAMIC FLOOR TILES EXTERNALLY OVER THE ARDEX WPM 002 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM Use ARDEX X77 ADHESIVE which is a Flexible Cement Based Tiling Adhesive using a 10X10X10mm (minimum size) Notch Trowel for this External Floor Tiling application over the ARDEX WPM 002 Waterproofing Membrane and the ARDEX DS 40 Acoustic Soundproof Underlay. Note: Tiles, Adhesive and Grout must be stored under cover and out of direct sunlight for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation.
MIXING The mixing ratio of ARDEX X77 Flexible Cement Based Adhesive to Water is approximately 6.5 Litres of WATER to 20kg ARDEX X77 Powder at 23oC. In hotter climatic conditions (high temperature and high humidity) increase the amount of Water to a wetter mix. (Approximately 7-7.5 litres per 20kg). Mix small proportions at a time by pouring the Powder into the Water continuously stirring the mix with a mechanical stirrer using a low speed drill, or by hand until it becomes a wet, smooth paste free from lumps.
APPLICATION Apply the mixed ARDEX X77 Flexible Cement Based Adhesive using a 10X10X10mm (minimum size) Notch Trowel for this External Floor Tiling application over the ARDEX WPM 002 Waterproofing Membrane and the ARDEX DS 40 Acoustic Soundproof Underlay. GROUTING For increased flexibility, greater internal strength and resistance to mould growth, use ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixed with diluted A.B.A. Grout Booster. For hot weather conditions and when grouting porous bodied tiles, it is advisable to pre-wet the joints prior to grouting to overcome any likelihood of colour variation when the product is drying in the joints. MIXING Mix 5kg of ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout with approximately 1 Litre of Liquid consisting of 50% A.B.A. Grout Booster and 50% Clean Water with a low speed stirrer or by hand to achieve a lump free, firm paste. The mix is now ready to be applied into the joints. APPLICATION Apply the wet ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixture with a suitable rubber squeegee and work into the joint. Grout will set quickly, so confine application and clean up of the grout to small areas at a time. Remove the remaining Grout off the tile surface with a damp sponge or cloth. Finally, buff tiles with a dry cloth to remove any remaining grout material. CLEANING All tools should be cleaned with water before the adhesive sets. After setting, cleaning becomes very difficult. Using warm water, detergent and soaking the tools will aid in the clean up of the uncured product. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 10 of 23
MOVEMENT JOINTS The location of Movement Joints must be decided at the design stage. Provide Movement Joints over existing expansion joints in the background. Provide Movement Joints at junctions between different background materials. At fixtures interrupting the tile surface and at internal vertical corners. At perimeter of floor surface and doorways and at Wall /Floor junctions. At a maximum of 5 metre intervals in a grid pattern for Floor Tiling. Joints shall go right through the tile and adhesive bed to the background and be kept free from dirt and adhesive grout droppings. Movement Joints shall not be less than 6mm wide. Joints other than those protected by metal or plastic edging subject to traffic heavier than light pedestrian, should not be wider than 10mm. Seal all Perimeter Movement Joints with a high quality flexible sealant such as ARDEX S.E. COLOURED SILICONE.
J.2.3
WATERPROOFING – MEMBRANE 3
APPLICATION
INTERNAL FLOOR TILING ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY, WATERPROOFING & TILING OF INTERNAL WET AREAS
PRODUCTS:
ARDEX MULTIPRIME ARDEX X56 ONE PART FLEXIBLE TILING ADHESIVE ARDEX DS 40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY SYSTEM ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ARDEX X56 ONE PART FLEXIBLE TILING ADHESIVE ARDEX FG 8 GROUT MIXED WITH A.B.A. GROUT BOOSTER ARDEX SE COLOURED SILICONE NOTE: USE ARDEX MARBLE WHITE TILE ADHESIVE AND GROUT FOR MARBLE APPLICATION MATERIALS The Waterproofing Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson in accordance with the Australian Standard A.S. 3740 (2004). “Waterproofing of Internal Wet Areas” Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Adhesives must comply with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 2358 (1990). Tile installation must conform with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). BACKGROUND PREPARATION CONCRETE SUBSTRATES (where applicable) Ensure that the Substrate are clean, free from loose materials, dirt, oil, grease and all forms of contamination. Remove any Concrete Sealers or Curing Compounds by mechanical means (e.g.:Scabbling Machine) from the surface. The Concrete Substrate should have a "woodfloat" finish or show a degree of porosity to ensure sufficient bonding of the Waterproofing Membrane. Dense Concrete Substrates should be roughened by mechanical means to remove laitance and to provide a good "key” prior to Priming and Waterproofing. Minimal Falls of 1:100 should be created in the Concrete Substrate prior to the application of the A.B.A. Soundproof Underlay System.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 11 of 23
Prime the prepared Concrete Surface with ARDEX MULTIPRIME by Paint Roller or Paint Brush and allow to dry. ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING Use ARDEX X56 TILING ADHESIVE using a 3x3x3mm Notched Trowel for the installation of the ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING. MIXING The Adhesive mixing ratio is 6.75 Litres of clean Water to 15KG ARDEX X56 Tiling Adhesive at 23 C. Mix small proportions at a time by pouring the Powder into the clean Water and continuously stir the mix with a mechanical stirrer using a low speed, or by hand until it becomes a wet, smooth paste free from lumps.
INSTALLATION Ensure that all Expansion Joints in the New Concrete Substrate are telegraphed though all layers to the tiled surface. Install a 10x5mm Foam Strip around all Perimeter Walls and Surface Protrusions to reduce sound transfer. Adhere the ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING to the prepared New Concrete Substrate applying the ARDEX X56 Tiling Adhesive with a 3x3x3mm Notched Trowel. Install the ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING with the fleece side down in a tight brick pattern and roll into the Tiling Adhesive using a Fluted Roller. Fill any gaps between the sheets using the Ardex Neutral Cured Sealant. Please Note: An Independent Acoustic Soundproof Report in relation to the performance of the ARDEX DS40 Soundproof Matting System is available upon request.
ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM is a rollable two part component liquid applied Waterproofing Membrane. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. SURFACE PREPARATION The ARDEX DS40 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAY MATTING surface to be treated with ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane should be dry and without traces of residue or permanent dampness. Any surface defects should be made good and all protrusions which may pierce the membrane shall be removed. MOVEMENT JOINTS Preparation of movement joints, which move in excess of 20%, is as follows: (a) Clean and fill the joints with ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone. (b) Apply the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the movement joints in conjunction with the reinforced Deckweb Matting; applying two coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. OUTLETS Ensure applicable Outlets are fitted. Outlets shall have provision for sealing waterproofing to outlets without penetration of waterproofing. Size to suit downpipe and drainage requirements. Dressing to Outlets
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 12 of 23
Dress membrane into the Outlets as follows: - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. PENETRATIONS - Flashings Ensure under flashing is fitted around the penetrating pipe, vent of the like, then dress under flashing to surrounding substrate as follows: - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. - On completion of waterproof membrane installation, cover the under flashing with cover flashing firmly fitted and sealed to penetrating pipe, vent or the like. COVING AREAS AND CORNERS IN INTERNAL WET AREAS Apply a 10mm bead of ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone in all coving areas, corners and floor wastes prior to the application of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush. Immediately roll out the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a second heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. Coving Areas: Coving areas where the angle is filled with sand/cement mortar, does not need special treatment. Coving areas which are square (90o angle), must be treated as follows: Apply ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone to all internal Coving Areas. Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. APPLICATION OF ARDEX WPM 002 2- PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM. Mixing Mix 20kg of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Powder with 20 litres of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Liquid. Pour the Powder into the Liquid whilst continuously stirring the mixture with a low speed mechanical stirrer until it becomes a smooth paste, free from lumps and air pockets. The pot life of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane is approximately 2 hours at 23oC and 50%R.H. Application Two Coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane must be applied to ensure the correct thickness of 1.5mm is achieved. Apply the first coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint brush or paint roller over the area that has been primed. Apply it in different directions, to ensure complete coverage with no air bubbles. Second coat can be applied when first coat is dry enough to walk upon without unsettling the Membrane i.e:- approximately 1 hour. Apply second coat as per the first coat. The dried film should be approximately 1.5mm thick. Allow to dry completely for approximately 24 hours, depending on weather conditions before subjecting the membrane to foot traffic and tiling.
INSTALLATION OF THE CERAMIC FLOOR TILES INTERNALLY OVER THE ARDEX WPM 002 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 13 of 23
Use ARDEX X56 Flexible Tiling Adhesive using a 10X10X10mm (minimum size) Notch Trowel for this Internal Floor Tiling application over the ARDEX WPM 002 Waterproofing Membrane and the ARDEX DS 40 Acoustic Soundproof Underlay. MIXING The Adhesive mixing ratio is 6.75 Litres of clean Water to 15KG ARDEX X56 Tiling Adhesive at 23 C. Mix small proportions at a time by pouring the Powder into the clean Water and continuously stir the mix with a mechanical stirrer using a low speed, or by hand until it becomes a wet, smooth paste free from lumps. APPLICATION Apply the mixed ARDEX X56 Flexible Tiling Adhesive using a 10X10X10mm (minimum size) Notch Trowel for this Internal Floor Tiling application over the ARDEX WPM 002 Waterproofing Membrane and the ARDEX DS 40 Acoustic Soundproof Underlay. Spread the adhesive in a manner so that it does not ‘skin’ prior to the bedding of the tiles. It may be necessary to “butter” the back of the tile as well. The whole of the back of the tile must be in good contact with the adhesive. GROUTING For increased flexibility, greater internal strength and resistance to mould growth, use ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixed with diluted A.B.A. Grout Booster. For hot weather conditions and when grouting porous bodied tiles, it is advisable to pre-wet the joints prior to grouting to overcome any likelihood of colour variation when the product is drying in the joints. MIXING Mix 5kg of ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout with approximately 1 Litre of Liquid consisting of 50% A.B.A. Grout Booster and 50% Clean Water with a low speed stirrer or by hand to achieve a lump free, firm paste. The mix is now ready to be applied into the joints. APPLICATION Apply the wet ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixture with a suitable rubber squeegee and work into the joint. Grout will set quickly, so confine application and clean up of the grout to small areas at a time. Remove the remaining Grout off the tile surface with a damp sponge or cloth. Finally, buff tiles with a dry cloth to remove any remaining grout material.
CLEANING All tools should be cleaned with water before the adhesive sets. After setting, cleaning becomes very difficult. Using warm water, detergent and soaking the tools will aid in the clean up of the uncured product. MOVEMENT JOINTS The location of Movement Joints must be decided at the design stage. Provide Movement Joints over existing expansion joints in the background. Provide Movement Joints at junctions between different background materials. At fixtures interrupting the tile surface and at internal vertical corners. At perimeter of floor surface and doorways and at Wall /Floor junctions. At a maximum of 5 metre intervals in a grid pattern for Floor Tiling. Joints shall go right through the tile and adhesive bed to the background and be kept free from dirt and adhesive grout droppings. Movement Joints shall not be less than 6mm wide. Joints other than those protected by metal or plastic edging subject to traffic heavier than light pedestrian, should not be wider than 10mm. Seal all Perimeter Movement Joints with a high quality flexible sealant such as ARDEX S.E. COLOURED SILICONE.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
J.2.4
Page 14 of 23
WATERPROOFING – MEMBRANE 4
APPLICATION:
INTERNAL FLOOR TILING WATERPROOFING & TILING OF INTERNAL WET AREAS
PRODUCTS:
ARDEX WPM 265 WATER BASED PRIMER ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ARDEX X77 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE ARDEX FG8 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED COLOURED GROUT ARDEX SE COLOURED SILICONE NOTE: USE ARDEX MARBLE WHITE TILE ADHESIVE AND GROUT FOR MARBLE APPLICATION MATERIALS The Waterproofing Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson in accordance with the Australian Standard A.S. 3740 (2004). “Waterproofing of Internal Wet Areas” Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Adhesives must comply with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 2358 (1990). Tile installation must conform with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). BACKGROUND PREPARATION SUBSTRATES (where applicable) Ensure that the Substrate is clean, free from loose materials, dirt, oil, grease and all forms of contamination. Remove any Concrete Sealers or Curing Compounds by mechanical means (e.g.:Scabbling Machine) from the surface. The Concrete Substrate should have a "woodfloat" finish or show a degree of porosity to ensure sufficient bonding of the Waterproofing Membrane. Dense Concrete Substrates should be roughened by mechanical means to remove laitance and to provide a good "key” prior to Priming and Waterproofing. Minimal Falls of 1:100 should be created in the Concrete Substrate prior to Waterproofing. Prime all Internal Concrete Substrates thoroughly with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer prior to Waterproofing. ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM is a rollable two part component liquid applied Waterproofing Membrane. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 15 of 23
SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be treated with ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane should be dry and without traces of residue or permanent dampness. Any surface defects should be made good and all protrusions which may pierce the membrane shall be removed. MOVEMENT JOINTS Preparation of movement joints, which move in excess of 20%, is as follows: (a) Clean and fill the joints with ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone. (b) Apply the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the movement joints in conjunction with the reinforced Deckweb Matting; applying two coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. OUTLETS Ensure applicable Outlets are fitted. Outlets shall have provision for sealing waterproofing to outlets without penetration of waterproofing. Size to suit downpipe and drainage requirements. Dressing to Outlets Dress membrane into the Outlets as follows: - Prime both surfaces with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer as specified in "Priming" - clause and allow to dry. - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. PENETRATIONS - Flashings Ensure under flashing is fitted around the penetrating pipe, vent of the like, then dress under flashing to surrounding substrate as follows: - Prime both surfaces with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer as specified in "Priming" - clause and allow to dry. - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. - On completion of waterproof membrane installation, cover the under flashing with cover flashing firmly fitted and sealed to penetrating pipe, vent or the like. PRIMING Apply one liberal coat of ARDE WPM 265 Water Based Primer to all substrates to be waterproofed. Apply the Primer with Paint Roller or Paint Brush and is touch dry in approximately 20 minutes. TREATMENT TO CRACKS Small hairline surface shrinkage cracks can be filled by the first application of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. For cracks over 2mm Wide, the following preparation is required:- remove loose particles and clean thoroughly. Fill the crack with a ARDEX Neutral Cure Silicone. Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting in conjunction with the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the crack.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 16 of 23
COVING AREAS AND CORNERS IN INTERNAL WET AREAS Apply a 10mm bead of ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone in all coving areas, corners and floor wastes prior to the application of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush. Immediately roll out the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a second heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. Coving Areas Coving areas where the angle is filled with sand/cement mortar, does not need special treatment. Coving areas which are square (90o angle), must be treated as follows: 1) Apply one coat of the ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer. 2) Apply ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone to all internal Coving Areas. 3) Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane.
APPLICATION OF ARDEX WPM 002 2- PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM. Priming Apply one coat of the ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer to the surface with a paint roller or paint brush. Priming coat will dry in approximately 30 minutes depending on weather conditions. Mixing Mix 20kg of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Powder with 20 litres of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Liquid. Pour the Powder into the Liquid whilst continuously stirring the mixture with a low speed mechanical stirrer until it becomes a smooth paste, free from lumps and air pockets. The pot life of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane is approximately 2 hours at 23oC and 50%R.H. Application Two Coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane must be applied to ensure the correct thickness of 1.5mm is achieved. Apply the first coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint brush or paint roller over the area that has been primed. Apply it in different directions, to ensure complete coverage with no air bubbles. Second coat can be applied when first coat is dry enough to walk upon without unsettling the Membrane i.e:- approximately 1 hour. Apply second coat as per the first coat. The dried film should be approximately 1.5mm thick. Allow to dry completely for approximately 24 hours, depending on weather conditions before subjecting the membrane to foot traffic and tiling.
RECOMMENDED ADHESIVE SYSTEM Use ARDEX X77 Off-White Flexible Cement Based Adhesive for all Internal Floor Tiling over the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane in this application. Note: Tiles, adhesive and grout must be stored under cover and out of direct sunlight for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation. MIXING The mixing ratio of ARDEX X77 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE to WATER is approximately 6.5 Litres of WATER to 20kg ARDEX X77 Powder at 23oC. In hotter climatic conditions (high temperature and high humidity) increase the amount of Water to a wetter mix. (Approximately 7-7.5 litres per 20kg). APPLICATION Apply the mixed ARDEX X77 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE using a 10x10x10mm (minimum size) notched trowel for all Internal Floor Tiling over the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane in this application.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 17 of 23
GROUTING For increased flexibility, greater internal strength and resistance to mould growth, use ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout. For hot weather conditions, or when porous bodied tiles are being used, it is advisable to pre-wet the joints prior to grouting to overcome any likelihood of colour variation when the product is drying in the joints. MIXING Mix 5kg of ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout with approximately One Litre of clean Water with a low speed stirrer or by hand to achieve a lump free, firm paste. The mix is now ready to be applied into the joints. APPLICATION Apply the wet ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixture with a suitable rubber squeegee and work into the joint. Grout will set quickly, so confine application and clean up of the grout to small areas at a time. Remove the remaining Grout off the tile surface with a damp sponge or cloth. Finally, buff tiles with a dry cloth to remove any remaining grout material. CLEANING All tools should be cleaned with water before the adhesive sets. After setting, cleaning becomes very difficult. Using warm water, detergent and soaking the tools will aid in the clean up of the uncured product. EXPANSION JOINTS The location of Expansion Joints must be decided at the design stage. Provide Expansion Joints over existing Expansion Joints in the substrate. Provide Expansion Joints at junctions between different substrate materials. At fixtures interrupting the tile surface and at internal vertical corners. At perimeter of floor surface and doorways and at Wall /Floor junctions. At a maximum of 5 metre intervals in a grid pattern for Floor Tiling Applications. Expansion Joints shall go right through the tile and adhesive bed to the substrate and be kept free from dirt and adhesive droppings. Expansion Joints shall not be less than 6mm wide. Expansion Joints other than those protected by metal or plastic edging subject to traffic heavier than light pedestrian, should not be wider than 10mm. Seal all Perimeter Expansion Joints with a high quality flexible sealant such as ARDEX S.E. COLOURED SILICONE.
J.2.5
WATERPROOFING – MEMBRANE 5
APPLICATION:
INTERNAL WALL TILING WATERPROOFING & TILING OF INTERNAL WET AREAS
PRODUCTS:
ARDEX WPM 265 WATER BASED PRIMER ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM A.B.A. M.P.P. MULTIPURPOSE POWDER ADHESIVE ARDEX FG8 FLEXIBLE CEMENT BASED GROUT ARDEX SE COLOURED SILICONE NOTE: USE ARDEX MARBLE WHITE TILE ADHESIVE AND GROUT FOR MARBLE APPLICATION
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 18 of 23
MATERIALS The Waterproofing Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson in accordance with the Australian Standard A.S. 3740 (2004). “Waterproofing of Internal Wet Areas” Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. Tiles should comply with the relative standard and should be of a suitable type for the job. Adhesives must comply with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 2358 (1990). Tile installation must conform with the requirements of the Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007). Tiles must be dry and the back of the tile should be clean, free from loose backwash. Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner as per Australian Standard A.S. 3958.1 (2007).
BACKGROUND PREPARATION VILLABOARD / W.R. PLASTERBOARD/FIRE RATED PLASTERBOARD All Sheets must be fixed in accordance with the Sheet Manufacturer’s Instructions and Recommendations. All surfaces to be Waterproofed must be dry, clean, free from dust, grease, oil and all forms of contamination. For Villaboard, clean all surfaces and prime with ARDEX WPM 265 WATER BASED PRIMER and allow to dry. For W.R Plasterboard Sheeting, clean all surfaces thoroughly and prime the base coat jointing compound only with ARDEX WPM 265 WATER BASED PRIMER. All Plasterboard Sheet Joints to be covered by the Waterproofing Membrane should be taped and covered with the Base Coat Jointing Compound only. Do not apply the Top Joint Finishing Compound.
ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE ARDEX WPM 002 2-PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM is a rollable two part component liquid applied Waterproofing Membrane. Workmanship must be carried out in a tradesmanlike manner. SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be treated with ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane should be dry and without traces of residue or permanent dampness. Any surface defects should be made good and all protrusions which may pierce the membrane shall be removed. MOVEMENT JOINTS Preparation of movement joints, which move in excess of 20%, is as follows: (a) Clean and fill the joints with ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone. (b) Apply the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane over the movement joints in conjunction with the reinforced Deckweb Matting; applying two coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 19 of 23
PENETRATIONS – Flashings Ensure under flashing is fitted around the penetrating pipe, vent of the like, then dress under flashing to surrounding substrate as follows: - Prime both surfaces with ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer as specified in "Priming" - clause and allow to dry. - Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush to both surfaces. - Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. - Apply a heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. - On completion of waterproof membrane installation, cover the under flashing with cover flashing firmly fitted and sealed to penetrating pipe, vent or the like. PRIMING Apply one liberal coat of ARDE WPM 265 Water Based Primer to all substrates to be waterproofed. Apply the Primer with Paint Roller or Paint Brush and is touch dry in approximately 20 minutes. COVING AREAS AND CORNERS IN INTERNAL WET AREAS Apply a 10mm bead of ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone in all coving areas, corners and floor wastes prior to the application of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a thin coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint roller or paint brush. Immediately roll out the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2Part Waterproofing Membrane. Apply a second heavy coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane to completely fill the mat. Coving Areas Coving areas where the angle is filled with sand/cement mortar, does not need special treatment. Coving areas which are square (90o angle), must be treated as follows: 1) Apply one coat of the ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer. 2) Apply ARDEX Neutral Cured Silicone to all internal Coving Areas. 3) Apply the reinforced Deckweb Matting (200mm wide) into the wet ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane.
APPLICATION OF ARDEX WPM 002 2- PART WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM. Priming Apply one coat of the ARDEX WPM 265 Water Based Primer to the surface with a paint roller or paint brush. Priming coat will dry in approximately 30 minutes depending on weather conditions. Mixing Mix 20kg of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Powder with 20 litres of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Liquid. Pour the Powder into the Liquid whilst continuously stirring the mixture with a low speed mechanical stirrer until it becomes a smooth paste, free from lumps and air pockets. The pot life of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane is approximately 2 hours at 23oC and 50%R.H. Application Two Coats of the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane must be applied to ensure the correct thickness of 1.5mm is achieved. Apply the first coat of ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane by paint brush or paint roller over the area that has been primed. Apply it in different directions, to ensure complete coverage with no air bubbles. Second coat can be applied when first coat is dry enough to walk upon without unsettling the Membrane i.e:- approximately 1 hour. Apply second coat as per the first coat. The dried film should be approximately 1.5mm thick. Allow to dry completely for approximately 24 hours, depending on weather conditions before the commencement of Wall Tiling.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 20 of 23
RECOMMENDED ADHESIVE SYSTEM Use A.B.A. M.P.P. Multipurpose Powder which is a Flexible White Adhesive ideal for all Internal Wall Tiling Applications over the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane System. Note: Tiles, adhesive and grout must be stored under cover and out of direct sunlight for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation. MIXING The mixing ratio of A.B.A M.P.P. Multipurpose Adhesive to WATER is 5 litres of WATER to 20kg M.P.P. at 23oC. In hotter climatic conditions (high temperature and high humidity) increase the amount of Water to a wetter mix. Approximately 5½-6 litres per 20kg. Mix small proportions at a time by pouring the Powder into the Water continuously stirring the mix with a mechanical stirrer using a low speed drill, or by hand until it becomes a wet, smooth paste free from lumps. APPLICATION Apply the A.B.A. M.P.P. Multipurpose Powder Adhesive using a 6x6x6mm notched trowel for all Wall Tiling of the Internal Wet Areas over the ARDEX WPM 002 2-Part Waterproofing Membrane System. Spread the adhesive in a manner so that it does not ‘skin’ prior to the bedding of the tiles. It may be necessary to “butter” the back of the tile as well. The whole of the back of the tile must be in good contact with the adhesive. From time to time remove one tile for inspection, as no voids should be left beneath the tiles. Spot fixing of tiles not recommended and should be avoided at all times. Attention must be paid to the open time of the adhesive which will be shorter due to the high temperature. Instead of 25 minutes at 23oC, it will be approximately 10 minutes at 35oC. GROUTING For increased flexibility, greater internal strength and resistance to mould growth, use ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout. For hot weather conditions, or when porous bodied tiles are being used, it is advisable to pre-wet the joints prior to grouting to overcome any likelihood of colour variation when the product is drying in the joints. MIXING Mix 5kg of ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout with approximately One Litre of clean Water with a low speed stirrer or by hand to achieve a lump free, firm paste. The mix is now ready to be applied into the joints. APPLICATION Apply the wet ARDEX FG8 Flexible Cement Based Coloured Grout mixture with a suitable rubber squeegee and work into the joint. Grout will set quickly, so confine application and clean up of the grout to small areas at a time. Remove the remaining Grout off the tile surface with a damp sponge or cloth. Finally, buff tiles with a dry cloth to remove any remaining grout material. CLEANING All tools should be cleaned with water before the adhesive sets. After setting, cleaning becomes very difficult. Using warm water, detergent and soaking the tools will aid in the clean up of the uncured product. EXPANSION JOINTS The location of Expansion Joints must be decided at the design stage. Provide Expansion Joints over existing Expansion Joints in the substrate. Provide Expansion Joints at junctions between different substrate materials.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 21 of 23
At fixtures interrupting the tile surface and at internal vertical corners. At perimeter of floor surface and doorways and at Wall /Floor junctions. At a maximum of 3.5 metre intervals in a grid pattern for Wall Tiling Applications. Expansion Joints shall go right through the tile and adhesive bed to the substrate and be kept free from dirt and adhesive droppings. Expansion Joints shall not be less than 6mm wide. Expansion Joints other than those protected by metal or plastic edging subject to traffic heavier than light pedestrian, should not be wider than 10mm. Seal all Perimeter Expansion Joints with a high quality flexible sealant such as ARDEX S.E. COLOURED SILICONE.
J.3.
RETAINING WALL
APPLICATION: WATERPROOFING TO RETAINING WALLS PRODUCTS:
ARDEX WPM 320 ONE PART RETAINING WALL MEMBRANE ARDEX PROTECTION BOARD
MATERIALS The Waterproofing Installation should be carried out by qualified tradesperson in accordance with the recommendations for use in the Ardex published Data Sheets for the nominated products. ARDEX WPM 320 One Part Retaining Wall Membrane should be installed by an approved applicator, well trained in the application of Liquid Applied Membranes. Installation shall be strictly in accordance with Ardex Recommendations.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 22 of 23
BACKGROUND PREPARATION NEW CONCRETE SUBSTRATES Allow New Concrete Substrates to dry and cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to waterproofing. Ensure that the New Concrete Substrate is clean, free from loose materials, dirt, oil, grease and all forms of contamination. Remove any existing Surface Contamination, Concrete Sealers or Curing Compounds from the Concrete Substrate by “mechanical means” (e.g.:- “Scabbling Machine and/or Diamond Grinder) or other suitable means of preparation. All dense Concrete Substrates must be roughened by “mechanical means” (e.g.:- Scabbling Machine and/or Diamond Grinder) to produce a surface profile between 75-150 micrometers, to remove laitance and to provide a good "key” prior to Waterproofing. The Concrete Substrate should have a "woodfloat" finish or show a degree of porosity to ensure excellent bonding of the ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane.
ARDEX WPM 320 RETAINING WALL WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane is a one component liquid applied latex modified bituminous elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane. ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane contains a root inhibitor that repels root growth without killing the roots. This product is ideal to be used for the Waterproofing of both Retaining Walls and Planter Boxes.
PRIMING ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane is self-priming on most surfaces. Wet or freshly placed concrete surfaces should be sealed with ARDEX WPM 300 Membrane in one coat at a coverage rate of 3.0 square metres per litre. Porous substrates such as aerated concrete should be primed with ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane mixed with 50% water or with ARDEX WPM 270 Solvent Based Primer. APPLICATION Apply a bead of elastomeric sealant to all expansion joints, corners, wall to floor/footing junctions and where movement will occur. Apply 2 coats of ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane at a total rate of 2.0 litres per m², and ensure full coverage with brush or roller. ARDEX Deckweb Reinforced Matting should be used between coats in all vertical and horizontal corners and other possible movement joints. ARDEX WPM 320 Retaining Wall Waterproofing Membrane may be fully reinforced if required such as over concrete block walls. When dry, check for pinholes and rectify if necessary.
DRYING TIME Allow 1-2 hours between coats, unless a reinforcement material is used between coats. In this case, the second coat can be applied immediately after the mat has been installed in the wet first coat. The membrane is fully dry in 24 hours, after which it should be protected with Shelter Protection Boards or Geotextile Fabric coated drainage cell. Backfilling should not be carried out until full cure is achieved after 7 days.
CLEAN UP & DISPOSAL Clean all equipment in fresh water immediately after use. Remove cured material with mineral turpentine or white spirits. Dispose of containers in compliance with all relevant local authorities, state, and federal regulations.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH TANKING & WATERPROOFING
Page 23 of 23
ARDEX PROTECTION BOARD On completion of the installation of the ARDEX WPM 320 Waterproofing Membrane, it is recommended that the ARDEX PROTECTION BOARD be used prior to back filling to protect the Waterproofing Membrane from damage. Under no circumstances should the membrane be left exposed to UV light for long periods.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
Page 1 of 10
CONTENTS
K.
PLASTERER .................................................................................................. 2 K.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................... 2 K.2 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................... 2 K.3 STANDARDS .............................................................................................. 2 K.4 PLASTERBOARD ....................................................................................... 2 K.5 GENERALLY .............................................................................................. 2 K.6 DOOR JAMBS AND SKIRTINGS ............................................................... 4 K.7 GENERALLY .............................................................................................. 4 K.8 FIXING PLASTERBOARD .......................................................................... 4 K.9 GENERALLY .............................................................................................. 4 K.10 INSITU MEMBRANE SYSTEM FOR WET AREAS .................................... 6 K.11 RESILIENT MOUNT SOUND ISOLATION SYSTEM .................................. 6 K.12 STEEL FRAME WALL SYSTEMS .............................................................. 6 K.13 PLASTERBOARD OVER MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLS ................ 7 K.14 MANHOLES IN FLUSH PLASTERBOARD CEILINGS ............................... 7 K.15 FLUSH FINISH PLASTER CEILINGS ........................................................ 7 K.16 RENDER AND HARD PLASTER SURFACES ........................................... 7 K.17 UNITEX RENDER ....................................................................................... 7 K.18 CSR FIBRE CEMENT WET AREA FLOOR SYSTEMS .............................. 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
K.
PLASTERER
K.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
K.2
SCOPE OF WORKS
Page 2 of 10
Work covered by this Section, but not limited to the following elements, all in strict accordance with the requirements of the notes included on the drawings as well as this specification. Plasterboard Suspended ceilings ExoTec Façade Panel Rendering Fibre cement Included in the Plastering work shall be grinding and filling imperfections in exposed in situ concrete and external surfaces, including soffits, in situ concrete stairs as applicable, where the surfaces are exposed and used as sub-base for direct application of an applied roll-on acrylic coating or painting. Refer also Section X - SEALANTS AND CAULKING FOR WATERPROOFING AND FIRE JOINTS Refer attached Exterior and Interior Finishes Schedule.
K.3
STANDARDS
Comply with the provisions of the current Codes and Standards Association of Australia: AS 1530
Fire Rated Systems
AS 2785
Suspended ceilings - design and installation
AS 2589
Gypsum Linings in residential and light commercial construction
AS CA27
Code of recommended practice for internal plastering on solid backgrounds
AS 3740
Waterproofing of Wet Areas within Residential Buildings
For Fire Hazard Properties comply with governing clause of the Building Code of Australia Specification C1.10a. The following BORAL Manuals/Instructions shall apply: Timber Stud Wall Systems BORAL Plasterboard Installation BORAL Ceiling Systems Installation BORAL Edge Profiles The following Manuals shall be maintained at the project site by the Contractor as a Controlling General reference: BORAL Fire and Acoustic Design Guide BORAL Plasterboard Installation
K.4
PLASTERBOARD
K.5
GENERALLY
The Contractor shall employ only accredited plasterboard fixers to install fire rated systems. Generally, use BORAL SYSTEM Plasterboard in dry areas only and for wet area walls and ceilings use BORAL WATER RESISTANT. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
Page 3 of 10
All materials must be kept dry, preferably stored inside. Timber Framing shall comply with AS 1684: ‘National Timber Code’ or AS 1720.1 “Timber Structures: design Methods’. Steel Framing shall comply with AS/NZS 4600 and maximum steel thickness shall be 1.25 mm where Gyprock plasterboard where acoustic rating required. Refer Wall types drawing. Non-loadbearing metal components and ceiling components shall be manufactured by Rondo Building Services or other approved manufacture. Concrete and Masonry Substrate shall comply with AS 3600 or it may be attached to a steel furring system in accordance with CSR Gyprock method. Refer drawings, Wall Types, Wall Facings for locations of following BORAL Plasterboards required for the Work: PLASTERBOARD BORAL SYSTEM Machine made sheet 10 mm or 13 mm thick composed of a gypsum core in a heavy-duty linerboard, with recessed edge/square edge (RE/SE). BORAL WATER RESISTANT PLASTERBOARD 10 or 13 mm thick to be fixed in lining the walls and ceilings of ‘wet’ areas. recessed edge sheet resistant to water penetration and combining a specially treated liner board and a water resistant gypsum core. BORAL FIRE AND WET AREA STOP 13 mm or 16 mm thick to be fixed to walls, ceilings and ‘wet area rooms’ scheduled for fire resistance. CEMINTEL FIBRE CEMENT WALLBOARD Including a recess on both long edges so that sheets may be flush jointed, using CSR GFC jointing materials. CORNICES Shall be set square. STEEL COMPONENTS Refer “Wall Types drawing”. RESILIENT MOUNT Shall be proprietary component used in conjunction with Rondo steel sections. STUD ADHESIVE Shall be Acrylic Stud Adhesive, coloured blue for identification. FASTENERS Ring-shank nails, hot-dip galvanised clouts, and screws for use with timber and steel framing shall be STRICTLY in accordance manufacturer’s instructions. MASTIC AND SEALANTS Shall be of approved manufacture. LEVELS OF FINISH All framing, plasterboard lining, jointing and finishing shall be carried out to levels in accordance with BORAL Plasterboard Installation Manual.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
K.6
DOOR JAMBS AND SKIRTINGS
K.7
GENERALLY
Page 4 of 10
Refer Interior Schedules and Drawings. At junctions with aluminium windows provide P50 plaster finishing bead.
K.8
FIXING PLASTERBOARD
K.9
GENERALLY
WALL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS Non-load bearing walls shall comply to minimum design pressure of 0.25 kPa and maximum deflection of 30 mm maximum and in accordance with BCA requirements. Load bearing walls shall lined with BORAL FIRESTOPS shall to meet the requirements of BCA Specifications and comply with AS 4600 or AS 3740. Provide Control Joints as follows: Non-tiled internal walls with fibre cement outer layer – at 7.2 m maximum centres. Tiled internal walls with fibre cement outer layer – at 4.2 m maximum centres. Walls with plasterboard outer layer – 12 m maximum centres. CEILING SYSTEMS Timber members to which plasterboard will be direct fixed shall comply with AS 1684 ‘Residential Timber Framed Construction’. Steel framing to which plasterboard will be fixed shall comply with AS/NZS 4600 ‘Cold Formed Steel Structures’. Ceiling suspension systems shall be designed to AS/NZS 2785 ‘Suspended Ceilings – Design and Installation’. Plasterboard must be screw fixed only, adhesive is not permitted. All perimeter gaps and penetrations must be completely filled with approved caulking material. Ceiling systems with plasterboard linings must have control joints at 12 m maximum spacing in both directions. WALL CONTROL JOINTS Shall be constructed in accordance with BORAL instructions. Backing Rod shall be 22 mm dia. for non fire rated and acoustic applications. Fire Mastic shall be used as applicable.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
Page 5 of 10
SERVICE PENETRATIONS Where/if fire and acoustic rated switch boxes are specified, Promat, Clipsal or HPM to be used to assist in maintaining the acoustic energy of wall systems. Seal around all penetrations with CSR Gyprock Acrylic Sealant/Fire Mastic. Wherever electrical switch penetrations are made 75 CSR Bradford Glasswool Partition batts shall be incorporated in the wall cavity to assist acoustic integrity. As an alternative to fire and acoustic rated power boxes standard power points can be used using the Boral Silencer in accordance with details shown under in the Boral Book. Plumbing or electrical penetrations in Fire rated walls shall be done in accordance with BORAL Instructions. CEILING CONTROL JOINTS AND CEILING PERIMETER Shall be in accordance with appropriate BORAL details. CEILING CONTROL JOINTS AND CEILING PERIMETER Shall be in accordance with appropriate BORAL details. FIXINGS Plasterboard shall be fixed as applicable with: Ring Shanked nails, Clouts, Screws. Laminated screws, Stud Adhesives, Masonry Adhesive. Wall plates must be fixed to the fire rated support structure with steel fasteners such as expansion anchors, easy drive masonry anchors and power driven fasteners. GENERALLY Refer Installation Manual for detailed jointing and finishing information.
Provide Fire Mastic in fire rated systems
Provide Wet areas acrylic sealant for non-fire rated area systems.
For Thermal and Acoustic Insulation refer Section KK of the Specification.
PREPARATION Thoroughly inspect framing to receive plasterboard lining. Framing shall be straight, true and of uniform dimensions. Studs and joists shall be in true alignment. Spacing of framing shall not exceed the maximum allowable for the thickness of plasterboard to be used. Studs shall be checked to accommodate sanitary fittings. Noggings shall be provided adjacent to each pipe penetration, sanitary fittings and toilet accessories as applicable. FIXING Fix plasterboard to wall or ceiling framing, timber battens, furring channels using maximum length boards to minimize butt joints. Fix plasterboard with: Plasterboard countersunk headed nails and approved adhesive attachments. Plasterboard self-tapping and self-drilling screws and approved adhesive attachments. Fixing shall be located at 300 mm centres, 10 mm from board edges, and at intermediate bearers. Adhesive application of Plasterboard shall not be used for Fire Rated applications. Finish plasterboard joints and stop beads with Joint System recommended by the manufacturer. Finish recessed jointed plasterboard with an approved finishing compound.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
Page 6 of 10
Fill in all joints and nail holes with jointing plaster, embed a strip of reinforced tape in the joints, apply plaster coat, allow to set and apply further plaster feathered out beyond the joint each side and trowel smooth. Allow to set, and carefully polish off to a smooth even surface. Fix metal accessories strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where fire ratings are required, the appropriate thickness and multiple layers shall be provided to achieve the required ratings and to ensure balanced construction. Fire rated walls shall be lined with appropriate selected system complying with BCA requirements. Refer also Section: SEALANTS AND CAULKING FOR WATERPROOFING AND FIRE JOINTS Form control joints in plasterboard with Control Joint Bead as recommended by the plasterboard manufacturer for surfaces abutting dissimilar wall materials or in wall runs over 12 metre length, or where new work abuts existing. Ensure that all finished surfaces are true to plane without distortions, and free from damage and blemishes.
K.10
INSITU MEMBRANE SYSTEM FOR WET AREAS
Generally, comply with AS 3740 – Waterproofing of Wet Areas and use moisture resistant BORAL plasterboard. BORAL Water Resistant plasterboard shall be manufactured to meet the requirements of AS 2588 and the water resistance requirements of ASTM C630. Use a waterproof sealer to Shower recesses. Wall sheets to be used as a substrate for tiling must be fixed to the framing with BORAL nails or screws. Adhesive fixing not accepted.
K.11
RESILIENT MOUNT SOUND ISOLATION SYSTEM
Resilient mounted sound isolation system shall be BORAL manufacture. For direct ceiling fixing, fix BORAL resilient mounts to underside of ceiling framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. RONDO SUSPENSION SYSTEM Shall be complete with furring channels, anchor and fixing clips as applicable.
K.12
STEEL FRAME WALL SYSTEMS
Refer drawings and schedules for types of systems comprising lightweight wall assemblies manufactured from zinc coated steel studs together with on or more layers of plasterboard. Provide control joints through the frame and wall lining, spaced 12 m maximum centres. Studs shall be Lipped Steel Studs with nominal width of 35 mm, a depth indicated on drawings and 6 to 8 mm lipped flanges provided with holes at regular spacings along the web for electrical/plumbing services. Refer “Wall Types” drawing for description. Construct non loadbearing frames in accordance with detailed manufacturer’s instructions including top and bottom tracks, deflection head channels, deflection head to track, corner beads and control joint trims. Examine floors and ceilings for level. Ensure that services to enclosed within partitions do not protrude and prevent plasterboard sheets from attaining true alignment.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
Page 7 of 10
Permanent earthing of completed steel frames shall be carried out in accordance with the regulations of the Electrical Authority. Complete framing shall be straight, true and of uniform dimensions. Studs shall be in true alignment. The bottom track shall be securely fixed with approved fasteners at 600 mm centres. Studs shall be located at not more than 500 mm centres, at corners, intersections and within 150 mm of ends of each length of wall. Ceiling tracks shall be accurately aligned directly over floor track and secured at similar positions as for floor tracks. Studs shall be seated squarely in bottom plates with webs at 90 deg. to the face of the wall. Gaps between track and irregular surfaces shall be caulked with an approved caulking compound. Fix metal studs to suspended ceilings and ceiling framing with toggle bolts or type "S" screws directly to plasterboard or furring channel of suspension system, or ceiling framing as applicable. Studwork shall be complete with junction, corner studs, plate and other sections of approved Gyprock manufacture, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The completed framing shall be true to plane with faces of members accurately aligned to ensure that the linings may be fixed without distortion or uneven surfaces. Apply plasterboard sheets to the studs. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition. To wet areas install plasterboard strictly in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions using flexible sealants, track noggings, UPVC angle cove and wrapped bottom edge to sheets. On completion of framing and before fixing plasterboard lining, check and remove all debris from cavities.
K.13
PLASTERBOARD OVER MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLS
Where shown on drawings or required line masonry walls with plasterboard fastened directly with approved masonry adhesive. The plasterboard dry-wall masonry system shall be CSR Gyprock. All services shall be installed prior to the plasterboard linings being fixed.
K.14
MANHOLES IN FLUSH PLASTERBOARD CEILINGS
To Non-Fire rater bulkheads where nominated by Mechanical Engineers drawings provide Trafalgar ceiling access panels with flush finishing bead to perimeter frame in flush plasterboard ceilings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Manholes shall be provided with hinges, lock and lugs or other suitable means for installation.
K.15
FLUSH FINISH PLASTER CEILINGS
Lining of suspended ceiling shall be plasterboard sheets as specified elsewhere. Fix to suspension system using type "S" screws and finish as specified under "Plasterer". Finish to all work shall be perfectly flat, even, straight, hard and free from cracks, blisters, blemishes and other imperfections.
K.16
RENDER AND HARD PLASTER SURFACES
K.17
UNITEX RENDER
RENDER Surfaces shall be prepared to the manufacturer's requirements. Any crumbling, loose or damaged surface shall be removed or patched and made good prior to coating. Ensure that all surfaces are free of grease, oils, dirt and dust.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH PLASTERER
Page 8 of 10
Apply: Uni-Cote Hi-Lite water-resistant render – 10 mm thick as a Base Coat.
Uni-trowel décor texture (pre-coloured) medium trowel finish (Unitex 155) as Texture Coat OR Dulux coating as scheduled; Unitex protective membrane (Uni-Flex membrane) – satin (low gloss) finish with integrated colour as Finishing Coat.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Contact 9768 7900. Submit a sample for approval by the Superintendent before proceeding with the Work.
K.18
CSR FIBRE CEMENT WET AREA FLOOR SYSTEMS
Apply the CSR fibre cement floor system to Timber (Posistrut) floor system (external or internal floors) as follows: Fibre cement compressed sheets shall conform to AS 2908 and be 15 mm (for joists 450 mm maximum spacing) and 18 mm thick (for joists 600 mm spacing) as applicable. Fasteners shall be No. 10 x 50 mm hot-dip galvanized steel or brass countersunk head woodscrews. Accessories shall be: Flashings Hypalong flashing strip, 130 mm wide Adhesive HydrEpoxy 501. Timber framing shall comply with AS 1694. Generally comply with CSR FC101 Instructions. Screw fixings shall be located at 450 mm centres along sheet edges and in the body of the sheet. Screw holes shall be pre-drilled allowing 1 mm clearance. All sheets must be sealed using HydrEpoxy 501, a two part water based adhesive. Refer CSR details for perimeter, doorway, shower hob (if required) flashings and waste installation details. If a fall to waste required, tiles shall be bedded into mortar bed which is not less than 12 mm thick. For Waterproof membrane refer Section J – ‘Tanking and Waterproofing’.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 3
THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION CONTENTS
KK. THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION ............................................. 2 KK1.1 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 2 KK1.2 NOISE LEVEL CRITERIA ........................................................................ 2 kk1.3 FIRE AND ACOUSTIC SYSTEMS ........................................................... 2 KK1.4 THERMAL INSULATION ........................................................................... 3 KK1.5 HYDRAULIC SERVICES ........................................................................... 3 KK1.6 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS ........................................................... 3
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 3
THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION KK. KK1.1
THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION GENERALLY
The Insulation Work shall comply with AS 2627 & AS 3902 and manufacturer's requirements for Optimum Thermal Resistance, Sound Transmission Performance, Condensation control and Airspace resistance. OTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: The following standards are referred to in this Section: AS 1276
Methods for determination of sound transmission class and noise isolation class of building partitions
AS 1530.3
Early Fire Hazard indices
AS 1045
Method of measurement of absorption coefficients in a reverberation room
AS 2107
Recommended design sound levels and reverberation times for building interiors
AS 3671
1989 Acoustics – Road Traffic Noise Intrusion – Building Design and Construction.
The following shall apply: BCA Energy Efficiency Regulations. National Code of Practice for Synthetic Mineral Fibres published by Worksafe Australia. The recommendations of the Worksafe document, and those of any specific state regulations, shall be followed when transporting, storing, handling, using or disposing of loose rockwool. An approved particulate respirator conforming to AS 1715 and AS 1716 shall be worn during all work with loose rockwool.
KK1.2
NOISE LEVEL CRITERIA
Façade glazing shall meet Rw 32 when assessed under AS 1276-1999
KK1.3
FIRE AND ACOUSTIC SYSTEMS
GENERALLY Shall incorporate CSR Bradford glasswool and rockwool insulation. Polyester batts if required shall be of approved manufacture. Refer also to the requirements by the Association of Australian Acoustic Consultants (AAAC) and ‘Acoustical Star Ratings for Apartments and Townhouses’. Refer for BCA Minimum Performance Levels for Services and External Walls. Comply with ‘Detailing for Acoustics’ drawings shown on the Boral Book for small openings, gaps, cracks and holes (downlights) allowing airborne sound to pass through walls and ceilings. All perimeter gaps and penetrations shall be carefully and completely filled with approved cauling material. Refer also Specification Section X – Sealants and Caulking. RAIN NOISE The system shall selected in accordance with ‘System Selection’ and installed in accordance with ‘Rain Noise Reduction Ceiling Systems’ listed in the Boral Book.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 3
THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION KK1.4 THERMAL INSULATION Refer “Wall Types” drawing for Insulation details. For “Timber Floor” provide R3.5 Bradford insulation. Install insulation in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on drawings. Where necessary, cut and fit insulation and completely fill all areas including behind switches, boxes, etc. Butt all joints tight. Voids will not be accepted, Replace any insulation which becomes torn, water soaked, or otherwise damaged. Insulation material shall be dry when installed and shall be kept dry. For roofing insulation refer Section "H". Refer "Plasterer" Section K. Where required install wire mesh, Roofsafe, Roofguard or similar approved mesh across roof truss. The wire shall be dished sufficient to accommodate the insulation allowing it to perform to specified value of the insulation.
KK1.5 HYDRAULIC SERVICES Cold water, hot water and waste pipes or plumbing fittings must not be connected to walls adjoining bedrooms and comply with AS 2107 – Recommended design sound levels. Pipes shall be supported from the concrete slabs, Posistrut and not from the lightweight ceiling support members or partition walls. Pipes must not touch ceiling or partition elements or their support. Pipes, fittings shall only be fixed to the inner studs and not be connected to the outer studs or outer wall skin. The ceiling system must not bridge the gap between the inner and outer wall components. The stud cavities of the outer wall shall be filled with mineral wool. Flexible connections shall be fitted to supply and drain pipes serving pumps, garbage disposal units, dishwashers, etc.
KK1.6
VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
Prior to installation of Insulation Work, the Insulation Contractor shall inspect all surfaces to receive said work, and arrange with the Contractor for the satisfactory correction of all defects in workmanship and material that could disaffect the work specified herein.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 12
METALWORKER CONTENTS
L.
METALWORKER ................................................................................................ 2 L.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................... 2 L.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 2 L.2.1 GENERALLY ........................................................................................ 2 L.2.2 FIXING DEVICES .................................................................................... 2 L.2.3 FABRICATION ..................................................................................... 2 L.2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION AND TREATMENT .................................. 2 L.2.5 FASTENERS ....................................................................................... 3 L.2.6 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS .................................................................. 4 L.3 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................ 4 L.3.1 GENERALLY ....................................................................................... 4 L.3.2 POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS .......................................................... 4 L.4 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS ...................................................... 4 L.4.1 GENERALLY ....................................................................................... 4 L.4.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 5 L.4.3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ......................................................... 5 L.4.4 aluminium DOORS .............................................................................. 6 L.4.5 ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAMES AND ALUMINIUM SCREEN TO .......... 6 FRONT ELEVATION ........................................................................................... 6 L.4.6 GLASS AND GLAZING........................................................................ 7 L.4.7 SHOP DRAWINGS .............................................................................. 7 L.4.8 PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 7 L.4.9 GUARANTEE ...................................................................................... 8 L.4.10 FRAMES .............................................................................................. 8 L.5 FIRE DOORS, FRAMES AND ACCESS PANELS ..................................... 8 L.5.1 FIRE DOORS ...................................................................................... 8 L.5.2 FRAMES .............................................................................................. 8 L.5.3 HARDWARE ........................................................................................ 9 L.5.4 TIMBER FIRE DOORS ........................................................................ 9 L.6 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK ............................................................. 9 L.6.1 GARAGE DOORS ............................................................................... 9 L.6.2 ROLLER DOORS ................................................................................ 9 L.6.3 BALUSTRADES .................................................................................. 9 L.6.4 BOLLARDS.......................................................................................... 9 L.6.5 STAINLESS STEEL ........................................................................... 10 L.7 HANDRAILS and BALUSTRADES ........................................................... 10 L.7.1 GENERALLY ..................................................................................... 10 L.9 LOUVRES AND SLIDING SCREENS ....................................................... 11 L.9.1 GENERALLY ..................................................................................... 11 L.9.2 SHOP DRAWINGS ............................................................................ 11 L.11 MAIL BOXES......................................................................................... 11 L.13 PRIVACY SCREENS ................................................................................ 11
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 12
METALWORKER L. L.1
METALWORKER GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Provide: Aluminium windows and doors Aluminium screen to front elevation Miscellaneous metalwork REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: The following standards are referred to in this Section: AS 1074
Steel tube and tubular sections for ordinary services
AS 1554
Structural Steel Welding Code
AS 1627
Metal finishing, preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces
AS/NZS 1664 Aluminium Structures
L.2
MATERIALS
L.2.1
GENERALLY
Unless otherwise specified, all steel shall be mild steel conforming to AS 1131, 1204 and 1405. Flat steel shall be galvanised by "Galvabond" process and conform to AS 1397. Steel pipe shall be water piping conforming to AS 1074. Tubular steel shall be heavy gauge, electrically welded and with all welds ground smooth and filled.
L.2.2
FIXING DEVICES
The Contractor shall provide all screws , bolts, rivets, anchors, welding equipment, brackets, adhesives, and other devices necessary for the satisfactory installation of metalwork items. All fixings shall be strong and suitable for the required purposes. Where used in situations which will be damp or subject to corrosive fumes or liquids under service conditions, fixings shall be of materials which will resist corrosion. Anchors for fixing to concrete or masonry shall be of approved metal expanding type (with galvanised screws or bolts of adequate sizes) used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Wooden plugs shall not be used for fixings under any circumstances. Plastic anchors may be used for very light fixings.
L.2.3
FABRICATION
All metal shall be prepared and drilled as required for all fixings and connections and shall be provided with all bolts, nuts and washers complete. Mild steel sections shall be undercut and welded with 6 mm continuous fillet weld ground flush and filed smooth. Ensure that all work is fabricated to actual dimensions required on site and that all dimensions are verified with other trades concerned.
L.2.4
SURFACE PREPARATION AND TREATMENT
FERROUS MATERIALS Thoroughly clean all surfaces of rust, scale, grease by wire brush, solvent or other approved method. Fill grind, make good welds, joints, etc. Apply one coat of red oxide zinc chromate anti-corrosive primer to minimum film build of 0.038 mm.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 12
METALWORKER GALVANIZING Where field welding of galvanised material is required, all welds and areas where zinc coating has burned off, the surfaces shall be cleaned and coated with zinc cold galvanizing to minimum film build of 0.10 mm . ANODIZING Finish all exposed aluminium surfaces with a hard finish anodic coating conforming to AS 1231. After anodizing and sealing, exposed visible surfaces of aluminium shall be protected with methacrylic lacquer. POWDER COATING The coating to all visible faces of where required by the drawings shall be DULUX Duratec, approved thermosetting powder coating of selected colour and not less than 50 microns thick. The coating shall be high gloss/low gloss/matt polyester modified epoxy modified polyester epoxy as noted on drawings or directed on site. The coating shall be applied and controlled on pre-treated surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The entire coating process shall be as recommended by Dulux Australia Limited and guaranteed for a period of three (3) years against film deterioration due to mis-adhesion or discolouration.
L.2.5
FASTENERS
WELDING, BRAZING, SOLDERING Welding generally shall be a joining process in which a significant amount of the base metal is melted during the operation. Welding in structural steel shall be as specified in that section. In aluminium it shall be by an inert argon gas arc process, or by resistance or pressure welding where appropriate. Brazing, soldering and bronze welding shall in each case form an intergranular bond between the metals used. Where joints made by any of the above processes are visible they shall be properly finished in a manner appropriate to the class of work, and before any further treatment such as painting or galvanizing is carried out. Ensure that there are no visible surface colour variations in aluminium after jointing. CONNECTIONS All fixings, fastenings, anchors, lugs and the like shall be of approved type and shall transmit the loads and stresses imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly. In joining make adequate provision for expansion. ANCHORS Unless otherwise specified masonry anchors shall be of the patent expansion type of approved manufacture. SCREWS Unless otherwise specified exposed metal thread screws shall have countersunk Phillips heads. Countersinking for screws shall be the exact size of the screw head which shall finish dead flush. FASTENINGS TO ALUMINIUM Fastenings to aluminium or aluminium alloys shall be aluminium alloy or non-magnetic stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Cadmium-plated steel fastenings in colour finished work shall have a matching colour finish of a similar type. Self-tapping screws shall be stainless steel. Nails shall be aluminium or stainless steel.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 12
METALWORKER L.2.6
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
SECTIONS - REFER TO SECTION "STRUCTURAL STEELWORK" FOR ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS Sections shall be of adequate strength and stiffness for their purpose. Extrusions shall be straight, with sharply defined profiles, free from defects impairing appearance or durability. Unless otherwise specified, details on drawings are given as indications of general requirements, appearance and order of size. Samples of sections proposed to be used shall be submitted for approval, which will be on the basis of general conformity with the details.
L.3
WORKMANSHIP
L.3.1
GENERALLY
All various members of steelwork shall be properly, neatly and accurately connected together with approved fixings. Provide all necessary brackets, sleeves, bolts and other accessories as required. Bolt fixing to concrete shall be by means of masonry anchors of approved manufacture and of suitable size, correctly fastened into background in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where dissimilar metals are in contact either in fabrications or where fixed on site, completely separate either by coating each contacting surface with one coat of bituminous paint, with 2-ply bituminous felt sheet to the entire contacting surface or by other approved means.
L.3.2
POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS
Power driven fasteners shall be of approved manufacture and correct type and size for the materials to be fastened and shall be fixed with a heavy type gun and correctly chosen charge. Fasteners shall transmit the loads and stresses imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly and shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
L.4
ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS
L.4.1
GENERALLY
Provide: Windows, Doors, sliding doors, security doors, Internal glass screens and doors complete with subframes, cover pieces, glazing channels, aluminium louvers, reveals, mouldings, hardware and all necessary door fittings, motors, gear, fasteners, flashings, gaskets, sealants and glazing, supplied and installed by: G.JAMES GLASS & ALUMINIUM PTY LTD AND VIRIDIAN NEW WORLD GLASS OF CSR PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS viridianglass.com or other approved manufacture. AND Glass doors shall be by Lotus Capral Window Frames shall be finished erected in accordance with Schedule of External Finishes. Install windows in accordance with AS 2047. The work included in this Section comprises the provision of all materials, labour, cartage, tools, plant appliances and things necessary for design, fabrication, delivery to site, unloading and storing, erection and installation together with the provision and building in of all allied independent sills, mullions and transoms, internal and external trims.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 12
METALWORKER The layout and dimensions of windows and doors shown on architectural drawings will be considered as nominal and diagrammatic for basis of design. The Contractor shall obtain and verify all dimensions of areas, locations and structural details from the site before commencing any shop drawings or ordering materials. Allow for submitting sample of finished materials to be used, as called for and covering any phase of this work. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide suitable wall openings to receive aluminium windows and doors. The aluminium window and door subcontractor, before proceeding with the work, shall inspect the walls and openings to be fitted with aluminium windows and doors and notify the Contractor of any defects which shall be rectified by the Contractor prior to commencement of the work. The commencement of installation of aluminium windows and doors shall be deemed to signify the acceptance by the subcontractor of the satisfactory conditions of the surfaces and openings.
L.4.2
MATERIALS
Screws, anchors, nuts, bolts and other fastening devices shall be aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non- corrosive materials. Weather strips shall be vinyl, neoprene or woolpile. Sealing and glazing compounds shall be of approved manufacture. Caulking compounds shall be two-part polysulphides of approved manufacture and selected colour. Flashings shall be 0.4 mm thick sheet aluminium securely fixed to frames.
L.4.3
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
All frames shall be designed to withstand loadings in accordance with the current AS Codes. Joints shall be formed by welding or concealed mechanical connectors and shall be watertight and opening units shall operate freely. No member of window shall deflect more than 1/400th of its span when subject to wind velocity. Water penetration to inside of building when subjected to the required wind velocities after or during heavy rain shall be nil. Air infiltration into the building through opening sashes shall not exceed 0.1 m3 air per minute per metre of sash perimeter with external wind velocity of 40 km/h with sash closed and locked. Air infiltration through fixed sashes under same conditions shall not exceed 0.05 m3 of air. Expansion and contraction must take place freely in the plane of the member or frame on an allowance of 1.5 mm for each metre length of any member or frame. Frames shall be plain rectangular box section fitted with lipped beads. Glazing rebates shall be of adequate size to hold the weight and size of glass and to withstand wind loadings. Fixing lugs of all metal sub-frames shall be suitably galvanised before building in. Adequate capillary breaks and expansion joints shall be provided to prevent capillary and expansion movement of water through butt joints and between parallel metal surfaces. The joints between the perimeter frames of units and the main structure of the building shall be sealed as required with an approved compound to provide a thoroughly watertight installation. Extrusions shall be not less than 2 mm thick for sills and 1.6 mm thick for main frame and sash members.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 12
METALWORKER Hardware shall be designed to perform the functions for which it is intended and shall be securely attached. All hardware including hinges shall be of non-rusting material. External door hinges shall be nylon washered aluminium hinges. Provide and fix all hinges, door locks and furniture, catches, handles, closers, stays, lifts, push bars required for efficient use and operation. Provision shall be made in the design for construction of units for adequate vapour barriers. A means of egress must be included for the removal of condensate. All units shall be designed and constructed to prevent air infiltration of static pressure. Frames shall be installed after openings have been formed and not built in as the work rises. Accurately position frames, ensuring that they are square and plumb and that sashes operate freely. Install windows and doors by methods which will ensure that neither the window frame nor the fixings will carry building loads, including loads resulting from short or long term deflection of slabs or beams. Moving parts shall operate freely and smoothly without binding or sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces. Protect glazing during construction with Protect’n’Peel 345 or other approved UV stabilized film.
L.4.4
ALUMINIUM DOORS
Glass doors shall be by Lotus (Shop frames only) Apartments to be Capral. Generally aluminium doors shall be framed consisting of heavy duty aluminium extrusions, glazed by snap-in beads and resilient glazing gaskets of commercial standard, complete with framing, door hardware and locking system. Seals shall be either weather seals or extruded PVC weather seals. Nylon brush seals shall be locked into galvanised steel strips and fixed in a groove in the edge of the door. For doors to swing greater than 90o provide wide throw hinges or offset pivots where necessary to clear jambs. Glass shall conform to the relevant parts of AS 1288. Glass shall match vision glass as specified under ‘Glazier’. Beads shall be square. Generally swing doors shall be pivoted incorporating an overhead closer and floor pivot. Hardware including locks and flush bolts as applicable shall be neatly and accurately fitted.
L.4.5
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAMES AND ALUMINIUM SCREEN TO FRONT ELEVATION
Frames shall be assembled from proprietary aluminium glazing suite sections, including necessary accessories such as pile strips, strike plates, fixing ties or brackets and cavity flashing, with suitable provision for fixing specified hardware; pre-finished with protective coatings, built in or fixed to prepared openings. Where the frame includes a threshold member, provide a self-draining section with anti-skid surface. Provide cavity flashings for external frames in cavity masonry. Provide for fixing hardware including hinges and locksets. Mount strike plates, locksets, flush bolts and the like flush with the face of the frame. Provide suitable cut outs and fixing cleats. Fixing to prepared openings: Countersunk flush or concealed screws at least 4mm diameter at 600mm maximum centres into masonry anchors in masonry structures and into the frame members of timber or metal structures. Building in: Fix with anchor brackets and attachments to AS 2047. For aluminium screen to Front Elevation refer Detail drawing and Finishes Schedule – External.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 12
METALWORKER L.4.6
GLASS AND GLAZING
Provide double glazing to windows except Shopfront and Entry. Provide complete, verifiable documentation, certification, which demonstrates the complete manufacturing and processing trail for all glass products. Determine the glass thicknesses in accordance with AS 1288, functional requirements including wind loads, deflections and safety, and manufacturers recommendations. Protect glass from damage during handling and installation. Provide temporary marking, if required and remove all traces on completion. Exterior glazing including louvres shall be weathertight, watertight and airtight and be able to withstand temperature changes, movements and wind loads without loss or breakage of glass, loss or deterioration of glazing gaskets, sealants and accessories, or other defects. Provide approved non-cellular elastomeric extruded profiles, including gaskets, seals and glazing accessories, required for complete installation, in accordance with ASTM C864. Glazing accessories including spacers, setting blocks, wedges, and the like, shall comply with AS 1288 and the recommendations of the glass manufacturer.
L.4.7
SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit 3 sets of scale drawings showing the design and construction of the aluminium work in such detail as to cover all points as listed below: a. Typical section through head, transom and sill showing flashings, beads, junctions with adjacent materials, etc. of windows, doors, glazed screens.. b.
List of proposed hardware to operate the various components.
c.
Glazing technique and materials, and types of glass.
d.
Window and door mechanisms. Provide samples of all glass.
e.
Methods of assembly.
f.
Methods of installation, including fixing, caulking and flashing.
g.
Provision for vertical and horizontal expansion.
h.
Hardware, fittings (Including Dorma door fittings) and accessories.
i.
Lubrication requirements.
j.
Structural computation.
L.4.8
PROTECTION
Protect aluminium faces from physical damage and staining at all stages of fabrication, storage and erection. Immediately wash off any mortar, plaster or other splashes on aluminium surfaces.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 12
METALWORKER L.4.9
GUARANTEE
Aluminium windows and doors shall be guaranteed for a period of three (3) years against faults due to water penetration, excessive air leakage, faulty operation of movable sashes and operating gear, rattles, discolouration, corrosion or change of colour components.
L.4.10
FRAMES
Pressed steel doors frames shall be of United Doormakers or other approved manufacture, fixed to concrete panels and cast into brick walls and with voids filled behind frame with grout in all cases, with welded frames complete with pressed metal spreaders at the bottom and provided with required fixings and hinges. Frames shall be pressed from 1.2 mm thick steel sheet, mitred, fitted and welded at corners and ground smooth ready for finishing. Drill, tap and prepare frames as necessary for the hardware specified. Fit mushroom rubber buffers to frames. Frames shall be of types specified and recommended by the manufacturer suit particular application. Weld base plates to stile to give correct clearance above slab for floor finish and fix to slab with masonry anchors. Attach fixing lugs to stiles suitable for building in. Secret fix lugs to adjacent walls through pre-drilled holes in face of stop with countersunk head dyna-bolts or screws as applicable and stop up all holes for painting. Set frames accurately and level in position and strut across opening. Build frames into place and grout up in cement mortar. Apply Expandite Thioflex 600 caulking in selected colour with packing strip applied inside and outside. Clean frames thoroughly and shop prime with an approved red lead primer. Cut back scratches, dents and other imperfections to bare metal. Repair dents with approved filler, feather out and prime.
L.5
FIRE DOORS, FRAMES AND ACCESS PANELS
L.5.1
FIRE DOORS
Fire doors and frame assemblies shall be manufactured by United Doormakers (Vic) Pty Ltd, Wormald Bros.(Aust.) Pty Ltd or other approved firm and shall comply with the scheduled fire rating. The doors shall be approved by the Fire and Accident Underwriters' Association and the Metropolitan Fire Brigade and comply with AS 1530 Part 4, 1990 and Fire Door Code AS 1905, Part 1. 1990. Obtain from the door manufacturer and deliver to the Superintendent before fitting any fire door, compliance certificate stating that all fire doors with combinations of hardware and fittings specified will conform to the requirements of Fire and Accident Underwriters' Association, above AS Codes and all interested Authorities. Guarantee fire doors against all defects including failure of adhesion of facing, for the period of three (3) years.
L.5.2
FRAMES
Form frames from 1.5 mm thick sheet steel to required sections, shaped to receive the specified hardware with door rebates of 25 mm to suit the door thickness and due allowance for rubber buffers and tolerances. Door frames shall be mitred and welded at corners and reinforced and shall incorporate a door seat rebate with a stop cover of no less than 25 mm. Supply frames complete with spreader bars, wall anchors, and all required accessories and with hinges welded on. Clean frames thoroughly and shop prime with an approved red lead primer. Strut frames across opening and build into prepared openings. Set frames square and plumb. Fix securely with metal ties and grout up on jambs and head solid with cement mortar. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 12
METALWORKER L.5.3
HARDWARE
All metal component parts of hardware shall be fabricated from high thermal resisting alloys. All fire doors shall be hung and the hardware fitted on site by the door manufacturer only, so that the completed assemblies comply strictly with the requirements for the required fire rating. Hang each hinged door on 1.5 pairs of 100 mm broad butt ball bearing hinges welded to the frame and securely screwed to the door.
L.5.4
TIMBER FIRE DOORS
Doors shall be constructed with a solid laminated infill core, with sub-frame reinforced for locks and furniture, door closers, accessories and fixings and a patent core matrix impregnated with fire resistant chemicals or laminated sheets of the resistant material as sub-cladding over a hollow core, faced with timber veneer ply prepared for painting.
L.6
MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
L.6.1
GARAGE DOORS
Remote control operated doors shall be of Airport Doors or other selected manufacture as scheduled. Install the doors so that in its closed position withstands pressure on the surface of at least 550 Pa without impairment of its ability to function under ambient temperature. Provide electric motor incorporation limit switches, manual safety stop and reversing mechanism and overload cutout operated by a battery-powered radio remote controller, and also by a direct push-button or key switch. Provide a motorised system that is capable of manual operation in the event of power failure. Locate operating switch 1500 mm above floor level. Provide automatic safety stop and reversing. Provide Shop drawing for approval by the Superintendent before manufacture.
L.6.2
ROLLER DOORS
Provide and install roller grilles of Airport Doors or other approved manufacturer to openings where indicated on drawings and noted in Door Schedule. The drums shall be manufactured from 150 mm dia. spiral lock tube attached to nylon drum wheel ends. The drum shall be fitted with spring counter balance mechanism and 40 mm OD shaft. Locking shall be deadlock mortice type concealed within the bottom rail. The lock shall be keyed to master key system proposed for all new locks.
L.6.3
BALUSTRADES
Refer drawings and schedules for Nu-Lite balustrades Type S1001 or other approved with 10 mm toughened glass. Stainless steel to be 316 marine grade.
L.6.4
BOLLARDS
Bollards shall be embedded in reinforced concrete footing.Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide shop drawings before installation.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 10 of 12
METALWORKER L.6.5
STAINLESS STEEL
GENERALLY Stainless steel shall be approved grades, finished to match control samples, in accordance with relevant codes. ASTM A480M Specification for general requirements for flat-rolled stainless and heat resisting steel plate, sheet and strip. AWRA Australian Welding Research Association (now incorporated into the Welding Technology Industries Association, Freecall 1800 620 820). AWRA 13 Technical Note 13: Stainless steels for corrosive environments. AWRA 16 Technical Note 16: welding of stainless steel. Stainless steel generally shall be Grade 304 for internal locations and Grade 316 for external locations and structural work. Grade 302 shall not be used. Produce samples before manufacturing. Unless otherwise indicated, grain shall be vertical on vertical surfaces or parallel to the longer axis. Flat visible stainless steel surfaces shall not exhibit oil-canning or rolled ripples. Refer drawings for construction. SHOP DRAWINGS Supply shop drawings for the Superintendent's approval before proceeding with the Work, showing the relevant details of the all Stainless steel components used in the Works. Provide: Large scale details of construction, supporting framing, jointing, backing, methods of assembly, trim and fixing; Dimensions, clearances, tolerances; Specification of material to be used finishes to exposed members, corrosion protection, quality of stainless steel, performance data of components and assemblies, and any other pertinent information.
L.7
HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES
L.7.1
GENERALLY
Provide handrails, balustrades and glass balustrades of materials to Balconies, stairs and ramps as detailed. Erect and fabricate balustrades to form continuous runs and perform all site welding as necessary. All welds and joining shall be thoroughly ground and cleaned of to a smooth neat sectional finish ready for painting. Where applicable, set standards and end rail ends into prepared sockets and caulk securely into position with a filled epoxy resin compound finishing flush with adjacent surfaces. Stainless steel shall be of Grade 304, linished finish. Provide concealed fixing to stair or floor as applicable. The tubes shall be totally sealed with an approved epoxy sealer applied in a smooth, continuous coating. Where shown on drawings provide balustrade with laminated glass full height. Where shown on drawings and scheduled provide Nu-Lite balustrading Type S1001 or other approved with 10 mm toughened glass infill. Provide shop drawings covering each type of balustrade and handrail before manufacture. Include in the Shop drawings description of glazing, metalwork, D-Line handrails, methods of assembly, fixing and other pertinent details.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 11 of 12
METALWORKER L.9
LOUVRES AND SLIDING SCREENS
L.9.1
GENERALLY
Extruded aluminium louvres shall be of AGS Type Z, above glazing where shown on drawings. REFER DRAWINGS AND EXTERNAL FINISHES SCHEDULE. Louvres shall be of powdercoat finish to selected colour. Install louvre units and flash at sill with approved damp-proof course and seal around frame with approved sealant backed with a tight fitting plastic foam filler strip.
L.9.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
Supply shop drawings for the Superintendent’s approval before proceeding with the Work, showing the relevant details of the External louvres including the following where applicable: 1. Large scale details of construction, methods of assembly, trim and fixing; 2. Details of junctions with other materials; 3. Dimensions, clearances, tolerances; 4. Specification of material to be used, finishes to exposed members, corrosion protection, performance data of components and assemblies, and any other pertinent information.
Where shown on drawings provide Bike rails of Cora Expo Series or other approved manufacture. The Rails shall be constructed from 40NB (48.3) x 3.2 MD pipe fixed to 125 x 75 x 6 mm angle bases. Finish shall be - galvanised. Generally install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
L.11
MAIL BOXES
Comply with Australia Post guidelines. Coordinate with security services for keys and cylinders. Provide approved numbers. Provide two keys for each letter box address.
L.13
PRIVACY SCREENS
Refer Elevations, Details and Exterior Finishes Schedule.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 5
CARPENTER AND JOINER CONTENTS
M. CARPENTER AND JOINER .............................................................................. 2 M.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................ 2 SCOPE ................................................................................................................ 2 STANDARDS ...................................................................................................... 2 GENERALLY ....................................................................................................... 2 M.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 2 TIMBERS ............................................................................................................ 2 TRIMMING AND EDGING................................................................................... 2 M.3 WORKMANSHIP ......................................................................................... 3 FIXINGS .............................................................................................................. 3 M.4 FRAMING .................................................................................................... 3 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... 3 TIMBER STUD WALL FRAMES ......................................................................... 3 ADDITIONAL SUPPORT TO STUD WALL FRAMING ........................................... 3 BRACING OF TIMBER STUD WALLS ................................................................ 3 M.5 MOULDINGS ............................................................................................... 4 GENERALLY ....................................................................................................... 4 M.6 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING ................................................................... 4 M.7 NOISE REDUCTION UNDERLAY ............................................................... 4
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 5
CARPENTER AND JOINER M.
CARPENTER AND JOINER
M.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SCOPE The extent of work under this heading of the Specification will include the following : Timber framing work shall include, but not be limited to the following: General Carpentry and Joinery work Specified under Section MM “Doors” are: Doors and door frames Specified under Section MMM are: “Joinery Fitments” Specified under Section L are “Metalworker” are: Aluminium windows and Doors Refer Exterior and Interior Finishes Schedule. STANDARDS The carpentry work and materials shall be in accordance with AS Codes and standards nominated in the current edition of the Australia Building Code the Standards noted on the structural drawings. The following standards together with their relevant amendments shall apply : Timber Engineering Code Timber Fasteners Timber Framing Code Guidelines Posi-Truss Hardwood Flooring Boral Timbers
AS 1720 AS 1649 AS 1684 AS 1684 and AS 4440 AS 2784 AS 4708
GENERALLY The Contractor shall supply all necessary materials, employ experienced tradesmen and execute and finish the whole of the carpentry and joinery work in accordance with the best trade practice and this Specification.
M.2
MATERIALS
TIMBERS Timber shall be of the species and grades specified. If the grade is not specified, it shall be that normally used in the work for which the timber is intended. Timber shall conform with the provisions of any applicable marketing or timber users protection acts and regulations. All unsustainable timber imports shall be excluded. All timber used on site shall be recycled or from plantations. TRIMMING AND EDGING Provide trims to terminate work or finish neatly to adjacent work, including beads, mouldings, stops, junctions, capping and edges, only as detailed. Trim shall be not less than 19 mm thick kiln dried hardwood, unless otherwise approved or required. Trims may be MDF where appropriate.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 5
CARPENTER AND JOINER M.3
WORKMANSHIP
FIXINGS Provide all fixings, plugs, anchors, brackets, grounds, blocking and other fastenings necessary for the proper assembly and fixing of all work of this section. Conceal fastenings where possible. All fixings, fastenings, anchors, lugs and the like shall be of approved type and shall transmit the loads and stresses imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly.
M.4
FRAMING
GENERAL Provide trimmers and backing boards in walls and ceilings as required by the Hydraulics, Electrical and Mechanical Contractors for the fixing of equipment, switches, power points, light fittings, etc. The Contractor shall ascertain from these Contractors the particulars, positions, etc. of the required trimmers etc. and shall arrange for building in same. For architraves refer drawings. TIMBER STUD WALL FRAMES Where approved only frame walls in of sizes in accordance with Victorian Timber Framing Manual, Interior Finishes,” Wall Types” Drawing and Structural drawings and in accordance with: AS 1684 National timber framing codes. AS 1720 Timber structures (SAA Timber Structures Code). and with Bottom Plate not trenched for studs, Top Plate trenched for studs, Studs at not more than 500 mm centres. Form all corners and intersections with three studs. Maximum notch 20 mm . Bracing: "Teco" or other approved steel angle bracing with countersunk nailholes. Noggings: provided between studs at openings, and at door head, intermediate and skirting level. Provide additional noggings to support wall outlets and fixtures. Provide heavy duty noggings to support the weight of fixtures, overhead cupboards, sanitary fixtures and the like. For sizes refer drawings. Lintels to openings in stud walls shall be Teco or other approved pre-punched cold formed from Lysaght Zinc-Hi-ten G450 with coating of Z300 . ADDITIONAL SUPPORT TO STUD WALL FRAMING General: Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for fixing lining, cladding, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings as required. Maximum spacing of noggings: 1350mm centres. Noggings: Generally stud depth x 35mm wide, spaced at not more than 1.35 metre centres. Provide additional noggings for fixtures and flexible sheet linings as necessary. Heavy duty noggings: Where noggings are required to support the weight of fixtures and the like such as overhead cupboards and sanitary fixtures, noggings shall be 240mm high x 45mm thick F8 stress grade kiln dried timber. Set noggings flush with the face of the studs and to span between studs. BRACING OF TIMBER STUD WALLS Timber stud walls shall be braced with Tuff Span or similar approved structural plywood bracing F14 stress grade 4.5 mm thick complying to AS 1684.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 5
CARPENTER AND JOINER Studs at both ends of each braced section, and alternate studs, shall be attached to top and bottom plates with framing anchors, fixed on the opposite side of the frame to the Hardibrace sheeting.
M.5
MOULDINGS
GENERALLY Mouldings shall be purpose designed project specific Craftwood Mouldings manufactured from moisture resistant Medium Density Fibreboard, only as detailed. Skirtings, architraves and door jambs shall be provided to the profiles and sizes indicated on Finishes Schedules and/ drawings. The Mouldings shall be factory primed and ready for topcoating or staining on the job. Fix mouldings with annular grooved or spiral nails of no greater than 50 mm in length. Pilot pre-drill for edge fixing. Adhesive for fixing of mouldings shall be Laminex 615 or 440T. Generally, refer manufacturer's instructions for fixing and finishing.
M.6
PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING
Particleboard flooring where shown on drawings or scheduled shall be Structaflor and 19 mm thick minimum Red Tongue, manufactured with spline-joining system by Pyneboard Pty Ltd. Install flooring with staggered joints in accordance with AS 1860 and manufacturer's instructions. Fix flooring with nails or Structaflor construction grade adhesive or both. For Wet areas sub-floor refer r Section K.
M.7
NOISE REDUCTION UNDERLAY
Where scheduled to floors of Living Room/Kitchen and general areas of Apartments provide Recycled Footfall Noise Reduction Underlay from Amorim Cork Composites. Construct in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. All subfloor to be structurally sound, clear and level. The moisture content of the subfloor should not be more than 2.5% by weight measured on concrete subfloors. Install a p.e. insulation vapour barrier prior to AcoustiCORK C21 in accordance to Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions. Do not mechanically fasten the AcoustiCORK to the flooring.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 14
DOORS CONTENTS
MM. DOORS .......................................................................................................... 2 MM.1 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................... 2 MM.2 GENERALLY .............................................................................................. 2 MM.3 DOOR TYPES ............................................................................................ 3 MM.4 CARPARK ENTRY/EXIT DOORS .............................................................. 3 MM.5 FINISHING .................................................................................................. 3 MM.6 STEEL DOOR FRAMES ............................................................................. 4 MM.7 PROVISIONS FOR HARDWARE ............................................................... 4 MM.8 METAL THICKNESS .................................................................................. 4 MM.9 TIMBER DOOR FRAMES ........................................................................... 4 MM.10 HARDWARE .............................................................................................. 4 MM.11 WARRANTIES............................................................................................ 5 MM.12 TESTING .................................................................................................... 6 MM.13 AIR FLOW .................................................................................................. 6 MM.14 FIRE DOOR SETS ..................................................................................... 6 MM.15 DOOR SIGNAGE ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. MM.16 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE ................................................................ 7 MM.17 CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS .............................................................. 8 MM.18 CASINGS AND COVERS ........................................................................... 8 MM.19 LOCKS AND LATCHES ............................................................................. 8 MM.20 KEYING AND CYLINDERS ........................................................................ 9 MM.21 KEY NUMBERING ..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. MM.22 HINGES ...................................................................................................... 9 MM.23 HINGE SIZES FOR TIMBER DOORS........................................................ 9 MM.24 HINGE PROVISION ................................................................................. 10 MM.25 SLIDING DOOR TRACKS ........................................................................ 10 MM.26 ACCESSORIES........................................................................................ 10 MM.27 PROPRIETARY CAVITY SLIDING FRAMES ........................................... 10 MM.28 ACCESSORIES........................................................................................ 10 MM.29 SEALS ...................................................................................................... 11 MM.30 DOOR STOPS.......................................................................................... 11 MM.31 DOOR-FRAME ANCHORAGES............................................................... 11 MM.32 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 11 MM.33 DOOR-FRAME INSTALLATION............................................................... 12 MM.34 GROUTING .............................................................................................. 12 MM.35 HARDWARE INSTALLATION .................................................................. 12 MM.36 HAND OVER OF KEYS ............................................................................ 12
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 14
DOORS
MM.
DOORS
MM.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
Provide doors as scheduled and shown on drawings.
MM.2
GENERALLY
Flush panel doors shall be approved products, with internal framing, core material, face sheets and edge-strips fully bonded together with durable adhesives, in accordance with the relevant codes AS 2688 Timber doors. AS 2689 Timber doorsets. Doors shall be durable, rigid, free from visual defects, warp and bowing. Plywood and adhesives for external use and wet area doors shall be waterproof exterior grade. Include additional framing and blocking, and increase width of framing as required for hinges, hardware, accessories, edge grooves and rebates, and around openings. Include symmetrical blocking for locks on both sides of doors. Include hardware edge-strips to all edges of external and wet area doors, and to vertical edges (stiles) of internal doors. Include hardwood edge-strips to all sides of openings in doors. Thickness of edge strips shall be not less than 9 mm generally and not less than 18 mm for rebate edge-strips. For sliding doors, include top edge-strips with additional depth for sliding track rebates. Include grooves and rebates for seals and accessories. Include matching head-panels to over height door-frames where required. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and relevant codes, and fire doors in accordance with fire test reports. Examine door-frames and verify correct position and installation before hanging corresponding doors. Discard doors not compliant with relevant codes and doors with deflection or twisting exceeding +/- 2 mm over the door surface. Condition doors to average humidity in installation areas before hanging. Fit doors to door-frames with uniform clearance at each edge and machine as required for hardware. Seal cut surfaces, including door tops and bottoms, after machining and fitting. Edges of doors shall be lightly chamfered to prevent contact with jambs. Unless otherwise indicated, clearance after painting shall be 2 mm at jambs and heads, 2 mm at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 5 mm from bottom of door to top of floor finish or threshold. Install flashings, weathering and sealing as required.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 14
DOORS
MM.3
DOOR TYPES
Door types: Solid core doors shall have block-board cores and internal framing faced both sides with external grade plywood not less than 6 mm thick with edge-strips. Solid MDF doors for internal doors may be a single sheet of MDF. Semi-solid core doors shall have polystyrene foam cores and internal framing faced both sides with MDF or plywood not less than 6 mm thickness with edge-strips. Cellular core doors shall be pre-finished and ready for painting HMR faced doors fitted with 9 mm thick matching edge strips to long edges glued and nailed. For other types of doors refer Door Schedules. Door Minimum Requirement: Doors generally Min 35mm solid core doors. Carry out the installation of all doors and seals in a manner that will not reduce the performance of the doors including: • Ensuring doors are installed without warps and hung with even gaps. • Installing door with minimum gap at door bottom complying with manufacturer’s requirement. Threshold under door seal is to be level and flat. Install aluminium threshold plate under door seals where door seals close onto carpet. • Installing seals with minimum gaps at joints/junctions. • Adjusting seals so that they are acoustically effective around the full perimeter without excessive effort required to close the doors. • Ensure that the door hardware does not foul the seals and the seals form a continuous seal around the door perimeter.
MM.4
GARAGE ENTRY/EXIT DOORS
Vibration from the operation of automatic doors shall be vibration isolated from the building structure so as to prevent door operation from being audible within occupied spaces. Doors shall be quiet in operation while a isolation of the door equal to Embelton NRD mounts shall be used where the motors are fixed to the structure and Teflon guides install in all rails. Also ensure that door panels do not rattle, and the smooth operation of any door guides, rollers, etc is smooth. Door guides should be fitted with vibration isolated fixings where required to prevent door operation from being audible within occupied spaces. Door motors shall be fitted with a soft start/stop controller to minimise noise while the door shall be stopped approximately 5 mm from the slab/ground to ensure the base of the door does not contact the concrete surface.
MM.5
FINISHING
Timber Doors to be site painted shall be paint-grade, and factory sealed and primed to all surfaces including top and bottom edges. Doors to be clear finished on site shall be select grade and fine belt sanded to all surfaces. Factory sealing and priming shall be compatible with proposed site painting systems.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 14
DOORS
MM.6
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Steel (pressed metal) door-frames of Unites Doormakers or similar manufacture shall be fabricated to specified shapes and profiles, with provision for required hardware and accessories, in accordance with relevant codes. BS 1245
Specification for metal door frames (steel).
Door-frames shall be factory assembled by continuous welding. Corners shall be mitred and welds ground flush. ‘Knock-down’ door-frames and pop rivets will not be approved. Include rebates and double rebated where indicated or required. Frames for access panels shall be fabricated as door-frames with continuous four sides. Steel door-frames shall be fabricated from Zincalume coated steel sheet, coating class not less than AZ 150 for internal use and AZ 200 for external doors (AS 1397), and shall be protective coated at the factory after fabrication, with suitable primer applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
MM.7
PROVISIONS FOR HARDWARE
Make provisions during fabrication for fixing or site fixing of required hardware and accessories as appropriate. Comply with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and set-out templates. Comply with fire test reports for fire door-sets. Hinges shall be recessed into door-frames and screws fixed unless otherwise indicated or approved. Include reinforcement and stiffeners of not less than 3 mm steel sheet welded to door-frames. Hinge reinforcement shall be drilled and tapped to receive hinge screws with mortar guards for screw holes.
MM.8
METAL THICKNESS
Base metal thickness (BMT) shall be not less than:
Fire rated doors: 1.6 mm. Non fire rated doors: 1.2 mm.
MM.9
TIMBER DOOR FRAMES
Timber door-frames shall be fabricated to required shapes and profiles, with provision for required hardware and accessories, in accordance with relevant codes Countersink or otherwise concealed heads of fixings below the surface and fill flush with suitable matching filler. After fabrication, apply approved primer at the factory in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the relevant codes.
MM.10
HARDWARE
Provide fire rated and non-fire rated door-sets and access panels, including steel and timber doorframes, hardware, finishes and accessories, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submit manufacturer’s product data for proposed products and systems, including selection, preparation and installation instructions, and test reports. Include product data for:
Doors and door-frames, materials, construction details and finishes. Fire test reports and certificates. Acoustic test reports and certificates. Door-frame accessories.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 14
DOORS Submit representative samples of components, finishes and fabrications. Include samples for:
Door hardware. Door-frame accessories. Door construction including core, edge trim, surface preparation and finish. Door-frame construction including profiles, joints, welds, hinges, reinforcement and finish.
Submit shop drawings for construction details and set-out. Include shop drawings for:
Door-frame construction indicating profile, corners, welding and reinforcement. Door construction indicating core, edge trim, surface preparation and finish. Hinges, hardware and security devices. Anchorages and fixings. Complete manufacturer’s door and door-frame schedule, including number and location of each type, verifying compliance with the Contract Documents.
Submit the first completed example of each type of work with representative finishes and details for approval before processing with the remainder of work to establish the standard of installed work. Submit a details maintenance manual including cleaning, operating, repair and emergency procedures, sources of replacement and replacement methods.
MM.11
WARRANTIES
DOORS Provide an approved warranty from Practical Completion for a period of 7 years (the ‘warranty period’). Include all manufacturer’s product warranties. The warranty shall include removal and replacement of any defective door with a new door, including hanging, refitting hardware, painting and finishing complete. Include in the warranty as undertaking that the spare parts will be available for sale off-the-shelf, or with a lead time not exceeding two weeks from date of order, for the warranty period. DOOR HARDWARE The warranty shall include specific provisions and terms for failure of, due to, the following:
Performance and structural adequacy of hinges, closers, latches and locking systems. Excessive wear and stripped threads. Chipping, cracking, fading, or delamination of finishes. Fixings and mountings generally. Integrity of seals. Sagging, slackness or looseness of knobs and handles resulting from wear, relaxation of springs, stripped threads , or any other cause. Correct functioning of moving parts. Maintain and adjust the system throughout the defect liability period. Submit proposal for continuing maintenance on an annual renewal basis. SERVICE CALLS Include a certified undertaking that required service calls during the Defect Period and Warranty Period will be carried out not more than 24 hours than the time at which the call was made. Service calls related to human safety and breach of security shall be carried out not more than four hours later.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 14
DOORS WARRANTY CONDITIONS FOR TIMBER PRODUCTS The warranty shall include specific provisions and terms for failure of, due to, the following:
Splitting, cracking, decay and other defects in timber. Structural integrity, including integrity of fixings and adhesives. Dimensional stability, including warping, bowing and distortion. Fading, staining or delamination of sheet materials or finishes. Functioning of mechanical component.
MM.12
TESTING
The Superintendent may direct destructive testing of samples of each door type to verify internal construction. Provide additional doors for testing at the rate of one per 100 doors supplied. Doors for testing may be selected by Superintendent at random for doors delivered to site. Following selection, cut door into square quarters for immediate examination. If more than two doors, or one-third the doors tested, fail then all doors of that type may be rejected.
MM.13
AIR FLOW
Where indicated or required, under-cut bottom edge of doors to enable required air flow, or make openings for louvres, and receive and install louvres for Mechanical Services Section.
MM.14
FIRE DOOR SETS
Fire doors shall be approved types identical to prototypes which have been fire tested or with a supporting opinion fro a testing laboratory, in accordance with the Building Code of Australia and relevant codes. Submit details and test reports. Fire doors and door frames shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Manufacture fire-doors generally as for flush doors with solid core of inert mineral materials not containing asbestos and internal framing for required hardware and accessories, so that all items are contained within framing members and do not encroach on the core. Face sheeting and finishes generally shall match adjacent non fire rated doors, subject to compliance with the tested prototype or opinions obtained.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 14
DOORS
MM.15
HARDWARE AND FURNITURE
GENERALLY Door hardware and furniture shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended function of the doors, to match control samples, selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and relevant codes, and requirements of relevant authorities. Submit details. Verify correct handling of items before supply. Hardware may include hinges, strike plates, pivots, closers and security equipment. Coordinate with Electrical Services Section prepared by the Consultant for connection of electric strikes, security and fire controls. Include associated sundries including fixings, striker plates, shims and escutcheons required for a complete installation, whether indicated or not. Deliver hardware properly packed and labelled in the manufacturer’s original and unopened packets, including installation instructions and details delivery dockets. Hardware shall comply with not less than classification AS 4145.2 for usage and AS 4145.2 for physical abuse. Hardware to fire doors shall comply with the relevant codes AS 1905 and AS 1530. Unless otherwise indicated, door hardware shall enable escape from the inside of the room or area contained by the door hardware. MATERIALS Unless otherwise indicated, door hardware shall be manufactured from cast, forged or machined brass with electroplated finish, or stainless steel, and corrosion-resistant components, in accordance with the relevant codes. FINISHES Unless otherwise indicated, hardware and furniture shall be electro-plated to match control samples in accordance with the relevant codes. AS 1192 AS 1789 AS 1897
Electroplated coatings - Nickel and chromium. Electroplated coatings - Zinc on iron or steel. Electroplated coatings on threaded components (metric coarse series).
Where metal finishes are likely to tarnish, discolour or corrode, apply clear powder coating finish at the factory. Submit details. DOOR FURNITURE Door furniture shall be suitable for use with the lock or latch to which it is installed. Include key-ways, keyhole plates, snib turn-buttons, cut-outs and escutcheons for lock cylinders, required by the lock or latch type. Unless otherwise indicated, associate roses, escutcheons and plates shall be of matching material and finish. Unless the door furniture is indicated separately for each side of the door, supply furniture as a paired set for each side of the door. THROUGH FIXING OF HANDLES WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 14
DOORS All door handle assemblies shall be through-fixed. Lever axles shall pass through door, and lever fixings shall pass through lever-axle. Grub screw fixings will not be approved. Fixings to exterior furniture shall be concealed by metal thread screws passing through the door from inside into tapped blind holes in the furniture, or by an equivalent method. SPRINGS Lever handle assemblies shall be fitted with integral springs or combinations of springs to ensure handles return promptly to the normal or horizontal position, including combinations of hardware and furniture by different manufacturer’s. Springs shall have sufficient durability to resist sagging or relaxation of spring mechanisms for the service life of the hardware. Where lever handles are not fitted with return springs, ensure locks or latches include extra heavy duty springs. Submit details of spring strengths, including aggregates of spring strengths where more than one spring contributes to integrity of door handle assembly. FIRE DOORS AND ESCAPE Hardware to fire doors shall comply with the relevant codes (AS 1905 and AS 1530). Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, door hardware shall enable escape from the inside of the room or area contained by the door hardware.
MM.16
CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS
Door closers and controllers shall be approved types, selected and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for the size and weight of the door, door swings and intended conditions of use, including wind pressure. Submit details. Include electromagnetic hold open devices to smoke doors and fire doors as indicated, floor or head spring pivots and automatic door operators. Unless otherwise approved, closer operation shall be rack and pinion with compression spring. Closing speed, latching speed, and back-check shall be controlled by separate concealed key operated valves. Include manual hold-open device to closers where indicated. Include fixings, templates, adjusting tools and accessories required for a complete installation.
MM.17
CASINGS AND COVERS
Cover plates for floor mounted closers shall be of adequate strength and thickness to withstand foot traffic and related wear and tear without failure or denting. Unless otherwise indicated, closers for fire doors shall be surface mounted, and all other closers shall be semi-recessed. Closers mounted on doors swinging away from the closer shall have parallel type arms. Mount closers on ‘inside’ of room doors unless otherwise approved.
MM.18
LOCKS AND LATCHES
Supply approved locks and latches selected in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the intended conditions for use. Submit details. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 14
DOORS All latch-sets and locksets shall be from one manufacturer. Locks and latches shall be contained in rigid, durable enclosures, with working parts accurately fitted to close tolerance, free from rattle or excessive slack, appropriately lubricated, and free from manufacturing flaws and defects. Unless otherwise indicated, locksets and latch-sets shall be mortise type. Locks shall be balanced hub construction. Use only proprietary strike plates nominated for the required locks or latches. Do not use ‘universal’ strike plates. Bolts shall have minimum throw of: Latch-bolts: 14 mm. Dead-bolts: 19 mm.
MM.19
KEYING AND CYLINDERS
Master keying shall be a complete approved system designed in accordance with Owner’s keying policy, and shall be designed to accommodate future expansion. Submit details. Where applicable, keying system shall comply and be compatible with the Owner’s existing keying system, if any. Cylinders shall be solid brass, and tumbler pins shall be nickel alloy steel. Cylinders and keys shall be code stamped in a n approved location.
MM.20
HINGES
Hinges and screws shall be suitable approved types and sizes Coordinate with door-frame manufacturer for correct location of hinge recesses and screw holes. Steel hinges shall be painted in the system applicable to the door. Stainless steel, brass and aluminium hinges shall not be painted. Coordinate with Site Painting Section. Unless otherwise indicated, hinges shall be: Five-knuckle type, fixed or loose pins as indicated. Full mortise hinges with a hole in the bottom tip for pin removal. Ball-bearing type for doors with closers with flush bearings and button tips.
MM.21
HINGE SIZES FOR TIMBER DOORS
This to be checked and confirmed with the Door schedule as we have full height doors. Unless otherwise indicated or required, hinges for timber doors shall be not less the following. Check with Door Hardware Supplier. Width Thickness Mass (kg) Hinge size (l x w x t) 820 900 900 1000 1200 1300
30 35 40 45 45 45
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
16 20 30 50 70 80
70 x 40 x 1.6 85 x 60 x 1.6 100 x 75 x 1.6 100 x 75 x 2.5 100 x 75 x 3.2 125 x 100 x 3.2
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 10 of 14
DOORS
MM.22
HINGE PROVISION
Provide two hinges per door unless otherwise required by a fire test report, or as follows:
Doors over 2040 mm high: 3 hinges per leaf. Doors over 920 mm wide: 3 hinges per leaf. External doors: 3 hinges per leaf. Fire rated doors: 3 hinges per leaf.
MM.23
SLIDING DOOR TRACKS
Where indicated, supply approved sliding door tracks. Provide approved proprietary sliding door assemblies suspended from overhead tracks and wheel carriages for the size and mass of the doors. Submit details. Wheel carriages shall be fully adjustable precision ball type providing smooth quiet operation. Include overhead track supports, head and jamb linings and removable pelmets at the head to allow access to the wheel carriages for adjustment and/as required.
MM.24
ACCESSORIES
Include adjustable nylon floor guides to suit grooved or ungrooved doors, as applicable, and buffer type track stop to limit the travel of the door leaf.
MM.25
PROPRIETARY CAVITY SLIDING FRAMES
Provide approved proprietary frames, incorporating the overhead door track and assembled to accurately match the thickness of the wall into which it is fitted. Support the unit at the throat entrance by steel angles and finish with split jamb linings. Fix the frame direct to studs through top, base and rear members.
MM.26
ACCESSORIES
Where indicated approved accessories including buffers, strike plates, mortar guards, switch boxes, fixing ties or brackets, and cavity flashings. Mortar guards shall accommodate the full extension of the lock bolt and the correct operation of the locking mechanism. Make grooves and rebates for seals and accessories. Include rubber stops to door-frames on the closing side of single door-frames and heads of double door-frames to reduce slamming impact. Include mortar-proof universal block-out boxes with knock-out caps top and bottom for switches and mortise strikes welded to door-frames. Include temporary spreaders to door-frames to prevent distortion during building in screw fixed to each jamb for easy removal.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 11 of 14
DOORS
MM.27
SEALS
Door deals, including weather bars, smoke seals and air seals, shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction for door and door-frame construction, location and usage. Include fixings, rebates, grooves and clearances for correct installation and operation of seals. Coordinate with steel door-frame manufacturer for required rebates to steel door frames.
MM.28
DOOR STOPS
Provide door stops to limit door swing where indicated, or where required by the relevant codes, or where required to prevent damage to adjacent work by uncontrolled door opening. Verify floor or wall mounting location before installation where not indicated. Do not mount door stops to lightweight partition walls. For non fire rated doors, stops are not required for doors with closers. Where stops for non-fire rated doors are not practicable, provide overhead stays to control door swing.
MM.29
DOOR-FRAME ANCHORAGES
Door-frames anchorages and ties shall be durable, concealed, galvanised steel types to securely fix door-frames into walls, including not less than: Wire ties: 3 mm diameter steel wire. Straps: 25 x 3 mm steel strap or 10 mm deformed bar, U-shape fixed both sides of jamb. Screws or pop-rivets: Suitable size for steel wall framing.
MM.30
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A Generally: Do not commence installation unless conditions and substrates are suitable. Submit certificate to verify acceptance of suitability of conditions and substrates. B Door-frame installation tolerance: Set-out and erect door-frames to the following tolerances, and check before and after fixing: Location on plan: +/- 6 mm. Plumb, both planes: +/- 1 mm. Out of square (diagonal head to jamb): +/- 2 mm. Set-out door-frames to existing openings in concrete / masonry wall with nominal 10 mm clearance but not more than 20 mm, between door-frame and adjacent reveals.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 12 of 14
DOORS
MM.31
DOOR-FRAME INSTALLATION
Install door-frames in correct locations, alignments and tolerances with approved anchorage types and locations. Use corrosion-resistant anchorages, and include bracing to maintain door-frames in position until building-in or grouting is complete. Re-check set-out dimensions immediately before final fixing. Use methods so that base-structure loads and movements are not transferred to the door-frame.
MM.32
GROUTING
Grout door-frames to concrete and masonry openings as follows:
Fill cavities with grout progressively as work rises. Face of grout shall be 10 mm back from face of door-frame, unless otherwise indicated. Grout shall be as dry as practicable to enable complete filing of voids behind door-frames. Tool exposed grout surfaces square and smooth.
After stripping of grout stops, fill and repair voids, honeycombing and rough areas. Clean any grout leakage, and repair damage to priming as required. Fit grout stops full height to both sides of each jamb, fitted tight to door-frame and scribed to adjacent wall face to prevent grout leakage. Hold stops securely in place during grouting and curing.
MM.33
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
Install door hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and relevant codes, and the intended function of door. Verify delivery dockets and submit copies as a record of acceptance of delivery from hardware supplier. Keep hardware in a secure locked store unit ready for installation. Delay installation of hardware until completion of site painting where practicable, otherwise remove exposed hardware, store and re-fix after completion of site painting.
MM.34
HAND OVER OF KEYS
Unless otherwise directed, arrange for hand over of all keys direct by an authorised representative of the key manufacturer in person to an authorised representative of the Owner, by formal arrangement. Arrange for the lock manufacturer to submit direct to the Owner, a record of the master keying system indicating each lock type, type of key supplied, and key number for re-ordering. Arrange for hand over keys progressively on a floor-by-floor or area-by-area basis. Do not use any key supplied under the master system and immediately return any such keys which come into the possession of the Contractor.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION CONTENTS
MMM.1 JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION .................................................. 2 MMM.2 EXTENT OF WORKS ........................................................................... 2 MMM.3 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS ................................................. 2 MMM.4 SHOP DRAWINGS ............................................................................... 2 MMM.5 GENERALLY ........................................................................................ 2 MMM.6 GENERALLY ........................................................................................ 3 MMM.7 WARRANTY CONDITIONS .................................................................. 3 MMM.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 3 MMM.9 FABRICATION ...................................................................................... 4 MMM.10 FIXINGS ............................................................................................... 5 MMM.11 PACKING AND LEVELLING................................................................. 5 MMM.12 HARDWARE ......................................................................................... 5 MMM.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE ............................................................................ 5 MMM.14 RECONSTITUTED STONE BENCH TOP ............................................ 6 MMM.15 MELAMINE CARCASSES .................................................................... 6 MMM.16 PLASTIC LAMINATED DRAWER FRONTS AND DOORS .................. 6 MMM.17 DRAWER AND DOOR HARDWARE .................................................... 7 MMM.18 JOINERY INSTALLATION .................................................................... 7 MMM.19 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS AND OTHER STAINLESS STEEL PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................... 7 MMM.20 FITTINGS AND FIXTURES .................................................................. 8
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION MMM.1
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION
MMM.2
EXTENT OF WORKS
The scope of work described in this Section shall include the joinery fitments work for the new construction. Under the terms of this Specification the following conditions shall apply: Supply and installation of all fitments, etc. shown on the drawings, specified or scheduled, including supply, delivery to the building, hoisting, uncrating, assembling, setting in place, leveling and scribing to walls and/or floors as required. The construction of benches, cupboards, cabinets, shelving, etc. shall be generally as shown on drawings. Scale drawings of fitments are partly diagrammatic and do not show all details of construction.
MMM.3
STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
Fabrication joinery to match control samples and prototypes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and relevant codes. AS/NZS 4386 Domestic kitchen assemblies. AS/NZS 4387 Domestic kitchen assemblies – Method of test. Establish quality standards by samples and prototypes before commencing fabrication. Inaccurate or poor quality work will be rejected. Visible surfaces, profiles and edges shall be fabricated with smooth, straight lines and angles, and uniform curves. Install work accurately and rigidly to required locations. Permanently mark each joinery item with the manufacturer’s name on a concealed surface.
MMM.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit shop drawings for each type of Kitchen, Bathroom and Laundry and other Joinery Fitments to a scale not smaller than 1:50 showing: Overall dimensions Construction details of bench tops, drawers, benches and shelves Materials, thickness and finishes of elements including doors, divisions, shelves and benches Hardware type and location Locations of sanitary fixtures No change shall be made to this Specification or the architectural drawings however unless approval in writing has been received from the Superintendent.
MMM.5
GENERALLY
Should the Contractor find any discrepancies in the information supplied within these documents, he shall notify the Superintendent of such discrepancies before the closing date of tenders. Any discrepancy found at a later date shall be referred to the Superintendent and his decision will be final. All fitments shall be constructed so as enable them to be transported to the job in units and assembled in their positions without difficulty. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take account of all cartage, hoisting, passage through doorways, etc. and to divide the fitments into suitable sections whether or not indicated on the drawings.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION Fit joinery components accurately and securely together using jointing methods and adhesives appropriate to the materials and the application. Provide all fastenings and other items necessary for the completion of the work to a first class standard. All exposed arrises shall be lightly rounded.
MMM.6
GENERALLY
Built-in fitments shall be manufactured in an approved shop and be strongly, accurately and neatly framed up at shoulders, mortised and tenoned, with all joints and bearings secured, and fully glued with all necessary pins, screws, etc. and put together in a workmanlike manner. Provide and fix any moulds to all positions as may be necessary to form a satisfactory finish to all fitments. Securely fix fitments to floors and at back with all necessary bolts, masonry anchors, plugs, screws, brackets, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for fixing timber bases, metal frames , cupboards and cabinets in position. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of all fitments, bench tops etc. until handed over to the Proprietor.
MMM.7
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
The warranty shall include specific provisions and terms for failure of, or due to, the following:
Splitting, cracking, decay and other defects in timber. Opening or looseness of joints. Structural integrity, including of fixings and adhesives. Dimensional stability, including warping, bowing, and distortion. Dimensional, or loss of bonding. Fading, staining or delamination of sheet materials or finishes. Functioning of mechanical components.
MMM.8
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
The installed work, including fixings and framing, shall accommodate all temporary and permanent loads without failure of defects. Comply with the relevant codes. The installed work, including fixings and framing shall accommodate all movements in the basestructure, the substrates to which the work is fixed, and within the work, without failure or the transfer of loads from the base-structure of soffits to the work of this Trade Section. The installed work shall be connected to the base-structure or substrate in a neat, substantial manner by correctly selected and located connections so that loads can be transferred from the work to the base-structure or substrate in a manner which prevents displacement, distortion, or damage to the connections, substrate or the adjacent work. Connections shall accommodate movement requirements. Where work is subject to surface or concealed moisture, materials and construction shall be approved moisture resistant types, selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Materials and products, including fixings, concealed and structural components, shall be corrosion resistant or protective coated to prevent corrosion. Adjacent materials and products shall be electrolytically and chemical compatible with each other, substrates, and adjacent work, or shall be separated by approved procedures, shall be non-stainings and non-contaminating, and shall not cause visual or structural defects in adjacent materials. Where practicable, verify dimensions and locations of constructed and existing openings and surround frames before commencing fabrication and installation of inserted work.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION Unless otherwise indicated, apply equivalent coating systems to reverse sides and non-visible edges of sheet materials to minimise the affects of warping or stresses due to changes in moisture content. Fine sanding is not required for non-visual surfaces. Moving parts and components shall operate smoothly and silently without jamming, sticking, shuddering, or wobbling, without undue resistance, abrasion or noise, and with minimal human or mechanical effort to operate. All natural timbers and veneers shall be certified in accordance with the Forest Stewardship Council policy verifying that the source forest is managed under an approved management plan. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, fixings to finished work shall be concealed. Where visible fixings are required, indicate head types, finish and alignment tolerances of visible fixings on shop drawings. Visible fixings shall match control samples, and shall be evenly and neatly located to match adjacent substrates.
MMM.9
FABRICATION
Fabrication joinery to match control samples and prototypes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and relevant codes. Visible surfaces, profiles and edges shall be fabricated with smooth, straight lines and angles, and uniform curves. Install work accurately and rigidly to required locations. Assemble joints to a tight, hairline fit. Joints shall be screwed, glued, and reinforced with splines. Scribe internal and mitre joints. Dry, stapled assembly will be rejected. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, use concealed fixings. Fabricated joinery with cutouts and openings to receive hardware, appliances and services. Obtain and use manufacturer’s templates to ensure accurate size and location of cut-outs. Receive, unpack and install equipment items supplied by other Trade Sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Where installed after completion of joinery, obtain templates and coordinate with equipment supplier to ensure correct fitting of equipment and location of service points. Construct permanent access for routine service and maintenance. Do not commission or run equipment, or do anything which might commence or void equipment warranties, without written approval. Medium density fibreboard (MDF) shall be fine grained, uniform density, resin bonded board in accordance with the relevant codes. AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood based panels. AS/NZS 1859.2 Medium density fireboard. MDF shall be manufactured and branded low ‘Australian Made LFE’ (low formaldehyde emission) type by a member manufacturer of the Australian Wood Panels Association (AWPA). Particleboard shall not be substituted for MDF without written approval. Provide standard interior grade MDF for general purpose, and highly moisture resistant (HMR) grade for wet area locations or where subject to wetting. Adhesives shall be durable types selected and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the substrates and conditions, sufficient to transmit the loads and ensure the rigidity of the work, in accordance with the relevant codes.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION AS 2131 As 2754
Adhesives – For bonding decorative thermoset laminates (contact adhesives). Adhesives for timber and timber products.
Adhesives shall not contaminate or stain adjacent surfaces. Adhesives shall be water resistant where required. Bond decorative plastic laminate to substrates with heat resistant, spray applied contact adhesives. Apply adhesives evenly without bulges or bubbles under finished surfaces and edges, or without migration onto adjacent surfaces.
MMM.10 FIXINGS Fixings, brackets, and anchorages shall be appropriate and adequate to assemble and fix work to the base structure in a neat, secure manner in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer’s instructions and relevant codes. AS 3566 AS 1214 AS 1897
Screws – Self drilling- For the building and constructions industries. Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread series). Electroplated coatings on threaded components (metric coarse series).
Fixings shall be corrosion resistant equivalent to or exceeding the members to be fixed or assembled, selected and installed to be non-staining to adjacent work, and prevent electrolytic corrosion.
MMM.11 PACKING AND LEVELLING Provide suitable concealed packing, separation and leveling to ensure finished work is plumb and level, and to prevent damage or abrasion of finished substrates at points of contact. Packing shall be non-corrosive, and prevent the migration of moisture or contamination between the substrates and the applied work.
MMM.12 HARDWARE Joinery hardware shall be approved proprietary to match control samples, selected and installed accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Submit details. Where nominated hardware is not available for any reason, notify reason for unavailability and submit proposal for alternative products. Where nominated hardware is available, no proposals for substitution will be considered.
MMM.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE Plastic laminates shall be approved types to match control samples in accordance with the relevant codes. Submit details. Adhesives – For bonding decorative thermoset laminates (contact adhesives). AS 2924 Decorative thermosetting laminated sheet. AS/NZS 1859.3 Decorative overlaid wood panels. AS 2131
Use only high pressure plastic laminate (HPL). Low pressure laminate (LPL) factory fabricated boards (Melamine) shall not be used and may be grounds for rejection of work in which such items occur. Confirm colour selection before commencing fabrication. Unless otherwise indicated, thicknesses shall be not less than: WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION
Horizontal surfaces: 1.2 mm. Visible vertical surfaces: 0.8 mm. Post formed laminate: 0.8 mm.
Fix laminate to continuous backgrounds with approved spray applied contact adhesives containing heat resistant additive, in accordance with the relevant codes and manufacturer’s instructions for the applicable conditions. For small areas adhesives may be hand applied. Seal joints between laminate and adjacent surfaces with sealant type in accordance with laminate manufacturer’s instructions, to match the laminate colour.
MMM.14 RECONSTITUTED STONE BENCH TOP Bench top shall be one-piece slab minimum 20 mm thick with arised square edge as per detail. Should join be required submit diagram for Designer’s approval. Stone shall be as specified in Finishes Schedule, hard, virtually non-absorbent, finished to high polish, selected figure and colour and finish. Stone to be quartz based suitable for Kitchen use. Stone slabs shall be free from chipped edges, seams, cracks, porous veins and other defects. The exposed faces shall be also free from stains and discolouration. Fix stone bench tops to fibre cement sheeting of joinery fitments with approved adhesive. Do all cutting required including boring neat holes for taps. All cut and drilled edges of marble slabs shall be ground smooth. Ensure any exposed returns setbacks/shadowlines are fully polished. Stone slabs shall be free from chipped edges, seams, cracks, porous veins and other defects. The exposed faces shall be also free from stains and discolouration. Do all cutting required including boring neat holes for taps. All cut and drilled edges of marble slabs shall be ground smooth. Ensure any exposed returns setbacks/shadowlines are fully polished.
MMM.15 MELAMINE CARCASSES Material: Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant structural grade particleboard. Edges finished in matching colour Laminate. Thickness: 18mm. Adjustable shelves: Support on BLUM library pins in ferrules into holes bored at equal centres vertically. Spacing: 75mm, unless otherwise detailed. Vertical dividers: 12mm thick high moisture and fire resistant melamine faced particleboard. Edges finished in matching colour Laminate. Fasteners: Conceal with finish.
MMM.16 PLASTIC LAMINATED DRAWER FRONTS AND DOORS Material: Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant structural grade particleboard. Edges finished in matching colour ABS-edge. Thickness: 18mm. Finish: Decorative plastic laminate where notated on drawings.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION MMM.17 DRAWER AND DOOR HARDWARE Shall be as scheduled or other approved manufacture. Hinge types: Concealed metal hinges: 110o opening against wall or cupboard unit: Rapid Clip hinges; 180o opening to other doors. Slides: Approved type metal runners and plastic rollers – as scheduled. Handles: as specified
MMM.18 JOINERY INSTALLATION Examine factory fabricated work for completion, and complete as required on site, including back priming and removal of packing. Do not install joinery units, which have been damaged or contain defects, including dimensional errors, which might impair quality of finished work. Return rejected units to factory and obtain replacement units. Install work accurately and rigidly fixed to required locations. Final touch-up, cleaning and polishing of joinery units shall be deferred until after installation. Install doors and drawers to fit openings properly, accurately aligned to provide even clearance all round. Re-hang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. Re-finish or replace doors damaged during installation. Install hardware and accessory items as required. Ease and adjust doors, and make adjustments for correct operation of hinges, locks, bolts, and hardware. Leave installed joinery in sound, clean, working condition. Splashbacks to Kitchens shall be glazed tiles as specified under Section “G”.
MMM.19 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS AND OTHER STAINLESS STEEL PRODUCTS The material used for the construction of sanitary fixtures such as sink and similar items shall be AISI Type 302 or AISI Type 304 stainless steel. Joints shall be carefully fitted, fully welded using electrodes of correct type and matching colour, and, where necessary, annealed after welding. Fabrication of sanitary fixtures shall be seamless. All surfaces which will be visible in the completed installation shall be smooth, true to plane, and free from defects. Protect all stainless steel units with an approved tough plastic coating before delivery. Maintain adequate protection at all stages, remove just prior to handing over and clean all stainless steel fixtures thoroughly.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 8
JOINERY FITMENTS FABRICATION MMM.20 FITTINGS AND FIXTURES Unless noted otherwise provide the following BLUM or similar approved hardware to Joinery Fitments:
Drawer Runners
Magnetic Catch
Shelf Supports
Hinges Concealed hinges 180 degrees opening.
Coat Rail 25 mm chrome metal tube.
Amenities Drawer
Amenities Rubbish Bins - Out Bin
Refer Fittings Schedule for selected handles and other products.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD ELECTRICAL
N.
Page 1 of 6
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
N1.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
N1.1
SCOPE
The work in this Section includes the supply and installation of all materials, labour, cartage, tools, and appliances necessary for the completion and testing of the electrical equipment specified and includes the following: New electrical lighting and power outlets, including, wiring, meter boxes, light fittings, switches, plugs, sockets and accessories. Builder is to allow to provide all electrical works in connection with mechanical services and heating installation. N1.2
LICENSED ELECTRICIANS
Electrical site work shall be carried out by electricians licensed to carry out such work at the particular locality. N1.3
STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
All work performed under this contract shall comply in every respect with the rules and regulations of the State Electricity Commission of Victoria, S.A.A. Wiring Rules A.S. 3000 Parts 1 and 2 as applicable, the Fire Underwriter's Association of Victoria and all other Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation. The wiring methods and materials used in the work shall comply in every respect with the current relevant standards and codes of practice published by the Standards Association of Australia. N1.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The electrical services shall be complete with all necessary equipment for their satisfactory operation, control, maintenance and safety under all conditions of service. Obtain and fill notices required by all Authorities, pay all fees. Submit to the Architect for his approval all drawings and information required. All electrical equipment, work and workmanship covered by this Specification shall conform to the best principles of modern engineering practice, be of first grade quality as to design, manufacture and installation. The electrical services shall be complete for satisfactory operation, control, and maintenance and safe under all condition of service. N1.5
SUPPLY GENERALLY
Consumer’s mains shall be of sufficient rating to serve the estimated maximum of the installation as agreed with the Supply Authority. N1.6
SWITCHBOARDS
Relocate and/or Upgrade the existing switchboard to new location – position to be determined on site with the architect or as required by the relevant authority. The Electrical Contractor shall have the Supply Authority Inspector approve the switchboard shop drawing prior to submitting same to the Architect for final approval prior to manufacture.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD ELECTRICAL N2.
MATERIALS
N2.1
WIRING
Page 2 of 6
Except where otherwise required by the wiring regulations of the Supply Authority, wiring shall be in thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables within stud or cavity walls, roof or ceiling spaces. PVC conductors enclosed in pvc conduits where cast in concrete slabs or chased in brick walls. TPS conductors enclosed in galvanised water pipe where underground. All power points, metal electrical appliances, and metal hot and cold water reticulation piping shall be earthed with approved twisted copper earthing wire in accordance with Local Authority requirements. N2.2
LIGHT FITTINGS
Refer to the Electrical drawings for location and types of light fittings. Generally low voltage light fittings. N2.3
ACCESSORIES
All switches and general purpose outlets shall be selected from the “Modena 800” series. Flush type silent switches and power outlets shall be used, having white or other approved colour cover plates and recessed switch button. All switches and power outlets shall be Modena 800 series by Electrical Solutions of selected colours. N2.4
BALANCING OF CIRCUITS
Balance the connected loads throughout the installation to the satisfaction of the Supply Authority. Calculate and check the maximum demand for all cables etc. from the information given about equipment to be connected and check the rating of all equipment accordingly. Final subcircuits for lighting in any one area must be connected to more than one phase in order to comply with the by-laws. Type written or printed circuit schedules are to be provided at the switchboard, stating the circuit number, rating, number of points in the circuit, their location, and the phase to which they are connected. Schedules are to be fixed in approved card holders behind clear perspex sheet, directly inside the switchboard door or in an alternative approved position. The location of light and power outlets shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and shall be confirmed with the Architect prior to installation. N2.5
APPLIANCES
Builder is to allow for the installation of all electrical appliances. Refer to Contract Documents for location. N3.
WORKMANSHIP
N3.1
CONCEALED WIRING
All wiring shall be concealed and shall be fixed in position prior to fixing of internal wall lining will be acceptable. N3.2
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
All switches shall be mounted in approved G.I. wall boxes with chromium plated screws. Supply all fixing devices and materials for the installation of all lighting fixtures. Clean all fixtures and lamps prior to and after erection to ensure freedom from dust, dirt and other foreign matter. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 6
Install all cables without damage to insulation and replace without cost any in which damage occurs. Erect all light fittings in a workmanlike manner square with other details, maintaining straight and true lines and vertical drops. Allow for fibre glass insulated cables to fittings as required by the Wiring Rules. Install switches which are shown adjacent to doors on the lock side. Check door swings before switch installation. Test all lighting fittings prior to erection and allow for repairing any that prove defective either initially or during the Maintenance Period. Supply and install an isolating switch adjacent to each appliance. Connect appliances fitted with flexible cords to the permanent wiring through approved ceiling roses. In other cases, terminate the circuit cables in a box adjacent to the appliance. Supply sufficient length of flexible conduit between appliance terminals and rigid conduit or box terminating circuit conductors to allow appliance to be removed for cleaning purposes without disconnection. N3.3
GENERAL POWER INSTALLATION
All wiring must be protected by conduit and concealed wherever possible. All outlets and combinations shall be rocker type, fitted with impact resistant wall plates to match switch plates. The combinations shall be mounted into approved G.I. wall boxes with chromium plated screws. N3.4
SUPPLY
Connect to and test existing meter panel and fuseboard. N3.5
TELEPHONES AND DATA POINTS
Installation of telephones and all data points are to be included in the contract. N3.6
TELEVISION
All TV points, antenna, all associated works is to be included in the contract N3.7
TESTING
Carry out all tests required by the relevant Authorities and perform without cost any making good necessary to obtain approvals. Hand over test certificates and approvals on completion. N3.8
SMOKE DETECTORS
Supply and install approved mains operated and fitted with LED indicators Smoke Detectors of Salveson Trading Pty Ltd or other approved manufacture. Install where shown on drawings or directed on site.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 4
PLUMBER
P.
PLUMBER
P1. P1.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS SCOPE OF WORKS
The work covered by the following specifications comprises the supply, installation, testing and placing into service: (a) Sanitary Plumbing (b) Cold Water Service (c) Hot Water service (d) Gas Service FOR SEWERAGE AND STORMWATER DRAINAGE REFER SECTION "SITEWORKS AND DRAINAGE". The Builder will be expected to ensure that all Sub-Contractors under his control supply materials, and perform building works and installations which comply with all such applicable Standards. P1.2
AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS
The following is a list of Standards in addition to the standards mentioned in Trade Sections. AS 1415
Unplasticized PVC (UPVC) pipes and fittings for soil, waste and vent
AS 1432
Copper tubes for plumbing, gas fitting and drainage applications
AS 3500
National plumbing code
AS 2032
Code of practice for installation of UPVC pipe systems
P1.3
AUTHORITIES AND REGULATIONS
The whole of the work shall be carried out by or under the full supervision of a fully licensed plumber in accordance with the Building Code of Australia, Victoria Water Supply and Sewer Plumbing Regulations, the Gas and Fuel Authority, Relevant Gas Supply Authority, drawings and specification, to the satisfaction of the Architect and to the standards and regulations of Melbourne Water and any other Authority having jurisdiction over the works and in particular those listed below: National Water Supply and Sewerage Plumbing Codes C.F.A. Australian Standards AS 3500 Building Code of Australia Health Commission Relevant Regulations and By-Laws of the Municipal Council and Fire Department Obtain certificates from the Governing Authorities indicating satisfactory completion of services and hand over to the Architect before application for Certificate of Practical Completion. P1.4
AUTHORITY CHARGES
The cost for all Authority's charges shall be paid for by the Builder.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 4
PLUMBER P1.5
TESTING
Carry out all testing as required by the respective Authorities. Supply all plugs, apparatus and other materials necessary for the tests in accordance with National Plumbing Code, AS 3500 and AS 2149. P1.6 CO-ORDINATION Co-ordinate the works of this trade with all others. Co-operate with the Electrical and Mechanical Subcontractors to avoid difficulties in set out. P1.7
PIPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
The Builder shall be responsible for correct placement of plumbing pipes in concrete and correct lagging of piping. It shall be the Builder's responsibility to investigate at the tender period all existing conditions on site and to allow for adjustment of the layout as necessary to complete the Works.
P2.
MATERIALS
P2.1
MATERIALS GENERALLY
All materials shall be the best specified quality to the Architect's approval. Provide all necessary connections, pipe fittings, solder fixings, materials and labour to complete the work in a satisfactory manner. Inspect all pipe and fittings before installation and ensure that no defective units are incorporated. All materials for the installation of sewerage and water services shall comply with all relevant Codes, Standards and Regulations. Materials for installation of drainage and water services shall be tested, with stamp of Approval/Australian Standard Mark. P2.2
PIPE SUPPORTS
Fix the various types of piping independently. Do not use supporting metal straps or tubes, etc. soldered to waste and other pipes. If such supports are used on prefabricated assemblies, they shall be cut at the job. Isolate between piping and all clips with approved insulation. P2.3
COPPER TUBES AND FITTINGS
Copper tubes shall be solid drawn in accordance with AS 1432. Joints in copper tubing shall be made with approved compression or capillary type fittings with silver solder brazing alloy. P2.4
PLASTIC PIPES
Plastic pipes for soil and waste stacks, branches and vents shall be UPVC pipes complying with AS 1415.
P3.
WORKMANSHIP
P3.1
GENERALLY
Conceal piping from view wherever possible. Set out pipes free of each other and so that they are readily replaceable for their full length. Pipes shall not be buried in walls, floors or other inaccessible places without the approval of the Architect.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 4
PLUMBER P3.2
ACCESS TO PIPING
Arrange pipework so that inspection openings, valves, etc. required for maintenance, are accessible through inspection panels in walls and ceilings. P3.3
ISOLATION
Isolate from each other, by an approved method of jointing or insulation, all materials which may set up a corrosive action when in contact. P3.4
PLATING
Pipes exposed in finished areas shall be heavily chromium plated.
P4.
WATER SERVICE
P4.1
GENERALLY
Construct water service in accordance with: The Victorian Water Supply and Sewerage Plumbing Regulations and the Relevant Authority; National Plumbing Code; Cold Water Hot Water
AS 3500.1 AS 3500.4
Construct the service in copper tubing conforming to AS 1432. Provide new tapping and meters to each unit for water service in accordance with the Melbourne Water requirements off the Authority's water main. P4.2
INTERNAL RETICULATION
Connect cold water as required to fittings, fixture and equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide sufficient lengths of lagged copper hot water piping to allow the Plumber to make connection to faucets and equipment. P4.3
TESTING
As pipework proceeds and on completion of each section of the work, test pipework in the presence of the Architect to a hydrostatic pressure of 1500 kPa. Maintain hydrostatic test for a minimum of 2 hours. Repair any defects and repeat test until the system is free from faults. Two (2) copies of certificates showing satisfactory completion of the work shall be obtained from the Authorities concerned and furnished to the Architect at the completion of the Work. P5.
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FAUCETS
P5.1
FIXTURES GENERALLY
Supply and install all sanitary fixtures and faucets. Fix in position and connect to water, waste and soil pipe lines.
P6.
SOIL AND WASTE PLUMBING
P6.1
MATERIALS
Construct soil and waste stacks and branches and vents in UPVC pipes in accordance with current Codes of AS.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 4
PLUMBER Supply and install floor wastes with flanges and stainless steel screwed type gratings set at finished floor level to suit floor surface grades. The traps shall be set watertight and connected to stacks, and effectively protected during building construction to prevent damage and ingress of dirt and foreign matter. P6.2
INSTALLATION
All pipes whether shown on drawings, specified or required shall be installed and concealed in an approved manner to meet structural and architectural conditions and as far as possible to avoid interference with work of other trades. Care shall be taken in the arranging of pipework appearance and true alignment where pipes are exposed. P6.3
CONNECTION
Connection to sewer drain, soil, waste and vent pipes shall be connected to sewer drain fittings with required compounds that shall be provided, fixed and finished to the requirements and the satisfaction of the Sewerage Authority's Inspecting Officer.
P7. P7.1
GAS SERVICE GENERALLY
All Gas fitting work shall be carried out by a registered Gas Fitter. Supply and install all fittings and lines in accordance with AS 1432 in copper tube Type B. Provide and fix a gate valve on the service. All pipes and fittings shall be seamless copper tube and copper alloy fittings in accordance with Gas Fitting Regulations. All underground pipework, except pipework under buildings and concrete slabs, shall be approved coated steel pipe with joints covered with heat shrink sleeves. Underground pipework under buildings and concrete slabs shall be copper, of approved manufacture. Isolating and appliance isolation valves shall be of a manufacture approved by the Gas Authority for the particular pressure involved and shall be a quarter-turn type.
P8. P8.1
HOT WATER GENERALLY
Install Rheem 160L Gas Storage Tank with 1 solar panel and 24L Gas Booster, refer to drawings for location. Confirm location of solar panel of site. Piping shall be of diameters recommended by the Manufacturer of the heaters. Conceal all pipes. Fix stop cocks of appropriate diameter in accessible positions at branches to fixtures. Reticulate pipes to fittings.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 9
PAINTER CONTENTS
R.
PAINTER ........................................................................................................ 2 R.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 2 R.1.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 2 R.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................. 2 R.2.1 RESPONSIBILITY................................................................................ 2 R.2.2 LIGHTING ............................................................................................ 2 R.2.3 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 2 R.3 MATERIALS................................................................................................ 3 R.3.1 MATERIALS GENERALLY .................................................................. 3 R.3.2 FILLERS .............................................................................................. 3 R.4 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................ 4 R.4.1 SKILLED TRADESMEN ....................................................................... 4 R.4.2 APPLICATION ..................................................................................... 4 R.4.3 PREPARATION, PRIMING AND SEALING ......................................... 4 R.4.4 CLEANING UP AND TOUCHING UP .................................................. 5 R.4.5 SURFACE FINISH ............................................................................... 5 R.5 GENERAL PAINTING ................................................................................. 5 R.5.1 EXTERIOR PAINTING ......................................................................... 5 R.5.2 INTERIOR PAINTING .......................................................................... 6 R.5.3 PAINTING BY SUBCONTRACTORS .................................................. 7 R.6 SPECIALIZED COATINGS ......................................................................... 7 R.6.1 FINISH TO INTERNAL DOORS........................................................... 7 R.7 CARPARK LINE MARKING ........................................................................ 7 R.7.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 7 R.8 FULL GLOSS COATINGS TO METAL SURFACES ................................... 8 R.8.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 8 R.9 ENAMEL PAINT FOR JOINERY................................................................. 8 R.9.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 8 R.10 FINISHES TO TIMBER SURFACES .......................................................... 9 R.10.1 GENERALLY........................................................................................ 9
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 9
PAINTER R.
PAINTER
R.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
R.1.1
GENERALLY
This specification is intended to include all obvious and requisite painting, coatings and associated work necessary for the proper execution of this trade. Refer finishes schedule for paint and locations. Refer Exterior and Interior Finishes Schedule. Do not sublet the work of any section of this trade except to competent specialist subcontractors. Painting and coating products for each coating system shall be from one manufacturer. Site painting will be subject to random testing.
R.2
STANDARDS
The Standards required for Painting of Building works shall be without exception equivalent to or better than all relevant to most recent Australian Standards. AS 1580
Methods of test for paints and related materials
AS 1318 1985
SAA Industrial Safety Colour Code
AS1319 1983
Safety signs for the occupational environment
AS1345 1982
Identification of the contents of piping, conduits, and ducts
AS 2311 1983 The painting of building (This document shall be maintained at the project site by the Contractor as a Controlling General reference)
R.2.1
RESPONSIBILITY
Commencement of any coatings shall be deemed acceptance of the surface as being suitable. Accept full responsibility thereafter for a satisfactory finish. Make good all defective surfaces before painting work is commenced. Consult other trades to ensure priming coats specified to be applied by those trades are of the kind recommended by the manufacturer or Consultant.
R.2.2
LIGHTING
Provide adequate artificial lighting in all areas where coatings are being applied to permit first class application and inspection.
R.2.3
GENERALLY
Inspect surfaces to be painted and make a satisfactory correction of defects in workmanship or material that might affect the finish. Finish hardware: Shall have been fitted and contact plates removed before painting. Plates for electric switches and plugs shall have been fitted and removed. Protect all floors, fittings and other materials against marking or physical damage by painter's plant. Protect adjacent surfaces with masking tape, dust sheets or other approved means. Where not shown on Schedule of Room Finishes, all faces of plastered beams, window and door reveals, where applicable, shall be painted in same finish as adjoining wall or ceiling finish. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 9
PAINTER
Notwithstanding the number of coats specified in schedule of work, additional coats as necessary shall be applied so that finished paintwork presents a solid even appearance free from streakiness, uneven gloss, paint runs and brush or roller marks.
Each coat shall be approved before next coat is applied; otherwise, an extra coat will be required over entire surface involved. This trade incorporates painting of all exposed metalwork (except pre-finished aluminium work and similar) and other items as called for and not especially included as a part of other Contracts. Provide all labour, materials, plant, scaffolding and cartage to and from the Works necessary for the supplying of paint and the completion of painting as specified. "WET PAINT" notices shall be placed conspicuously and shall not be removed until paint is dry. Prepare and submit approx. 600 mm x 600 mm samples of each colour and finish for approval before work of this section begins. For natural and stained finishes, provide samples of type and quality of wood to be installed on the project. Prepare sample wall areas as may be directed. These areas will be the standard of work for the project when approved. Take extreme precautions to protect exposed construction from paint splatter. Work that will remain unpainted shall be free from paint blemishes.
R.3
MATERIALS
R.3.1
MATERIALS GENERALLY
Commitment shall be made to use Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) paints including floor coatings. All materials used in the works shall be the premium quality prepared products of the following manufacture: Taubmans Dulux Others mentioned in the Schedules Deliver all materials to site in the new sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name. Apply strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations, and without any addition or adulteration except where such is in accordance with those recommendations. All sealers, priming paints, undercoats and finishing coats shall be of the type specified by the manufacturer as appropriate to the surface to be painted and to the succeeding and subsequent coats. All coats on any one surface shall be from the one manufacturer. On completion of painting work provide the Owner with unopened containers of each type and colour of finishing coating installed for future use. Quantity to be provided shall be a minimum of 2% of area installed, but not less than one (1) standard size container of each colour.
R.3.2
FILLERS
The filler for external work to be painted shall be linseed oil putty, applied after the priming coat. Fillers for internal work except where otherwise specified shall be approved proprietary fillers appropriate to the surface. Fillers for woodwork to be given a clear finish, shall be tinted to match the timber.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 9
PAINTER
R.4
WORKMANSHIP
R.4.1
SKILLED TRADESMEN
No unskilled painters shall be employed on the work. A properly qualified Painter Foreman shall be employed during the whole of this work. No paintwork shall be done in conditions which will mar the final finish to the work.
R.4.2
APPLICATION
Apply each coat evenly, free from air bubbles, runs, brush marks, sags, blotches and other defects. Each coat shall have a uniform finish and colour. Tints of undercoats shall be approximately those of the finished colours, and in order to indicate the number of coats applied, the undercoats shall have a difference in tint to each succeeding coat. The thinning of undercoats shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions.
R.4.3
PREPARATION, PRIMING AND SEALING
GENERALLY Wipe down all woodwork, wall boards and metalwork to remove all oil, grease or other organic coatings. No surface shall be painted until sufficiently dry to satisfy the requirements of the manufacturer of the material to be applied. All priming and sealing must conform strictly to the printed recommendations of the paint manufacturer for the substrate being coated and for the subsequent coats. TIMBER Before commencement of external painting, protect all uncoated steel nails and screws against corrosion where clear or natural stains to be used. All end grain, of both internal and external timber and timber cladding shall be primed all round before being attached to the building framework. All sharp corners shall be slightly rounded or eased by planing, scraping or sanding to ensure that they can be properly coated and that their covering is not rubbed through during sanding between coats of paint. Prime woodwork which is to be finished with paint, before delivery to the site. Site prime, with matching primer, the exposed faces of all joinery which is subsequently cut during building operations. Before painting, sand and reprime all wood surfaces where the primer has deteriorated and/or has been exposed to the elements for more than six weeks. Before staining, fill woodwork with an approved wood filling paste, and lightly sand. Do not prime or oil woodwork which is to be stained. Sawn surfaces shall not be sanded before staining. Dressed surfaces shall be lightly sanded before staining. Apply all priming and other first coats by brush. Paint the upper and lower edges of all timber doors and sashes after they have been fitted and ready for final hanging. CONCRETE New surfaces shall be preferably be treated with the phosphoric acid/zinc chloride pre-treatment described above. Efflorescence shall be removed by dry brushing or by wetting the concrete surface and then treating it with 10% hydrochloric acid. Allow to react for 5 min. scour the surface with stiff bristle brush, wash with clean water and allow to dry. Formwork oil may be removed by steel brushes, abrasive stones, detergent solutions or by light sandblasting. Following treatment, thoroughly wash the surface with water and allow to dry. Paint finish to precast or insitu concrete where scheduled shall be of colour as scheduled and/ or noted on drawings.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 9
PAINTER FIBRE CEMENT Do not paint "green", non-autoclaved, fibre cement until it is at least 3 months old. Completely dry and seal along all edges of fibre cement materials which are to have an impervious coating applied to both sides. Rub down any smooth patches in fibre cement with sand paper to form an adequate key. Brush and thoroughly wash down. Fill and flush all screw holes. PLASTERBOARD Ensure that all joints are prepared to a smooth finish and are free of dust before the application of paint. Seal with latex based sealer. PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARDS Unless otherwise required, prime and stop all surface holes, scores and similar defects to match the adjacent surfaces. Seal all surfaces before painting and /or staining. Fill exposed edges or particle board to be painted with approved white latex based air drying filler. Allow filler to harden, and sand smooth. GALVANISED STEEL Do not paint newly galvanised steel surfaces until such galvanised surfaces have been treated with an approved etching primer. Ensure good adhesion at the zinc paint interface by proper preparation of the galvanised surfaces and the use of only a calcium plumbate system. IRON AND STEEL Scrape down and wire brush all iron and steelwork which is to be painted but is not shop primed. Remove oil, grease etc. by rubbing down with mineral turps on clean cloth and finally remove all dust.
R.4.4
CLEANING UP AND TOUCHING UP
On completion of painting all tins and debris are to be removed from the site. All glass shall be washed and polished and left clean and free from paint and other markings. All floors shall be left clean and free from grime and paint spots. All paint spots on all surfaces particularly glass shall be removed. Painter is to touch up after other trades as necessary.
R.4.5
SURFACE FINISH
All work shall be finished uniformly as to coverage, paint build-up, texture, degree of gloss or matt and to colour. Work showing poor build-up, poor coverage or unevenness of finish or colour shall be re-coated to a satisfactory finish. Allow to repair and make good damage to materials specified to be delivered and installed pre-finished. Work showing bad brushwork, roller marks, bad stopping and surfacing, unevenness of texture or other blemishes shall be cut back to a smooth surface, brought forward and finished as specified. All work shall be completed to finish and colours as directed.
R.5
GENERAL PAINTING
R.5.1
EXTERIOR PAINTING
REFER FINISHES SCHEDULE FOR LOCATIONS External paint systems shall be : FIBRE CEMENT, CONCRETE, RENDER (i) Sealer (ii) Latex Paint (iii) Latex paint
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 9
PAINTER STEEL AND METALWORK (i) Primer for steel (ii) Primer for steel (iii) Full gloss solvent-borne (iv) Full gloss solvent-borne GALVANIZED STEEL - GENERAL (i) Galvanised iron metal primer solvent-borne or latex (ii) Full gloss solvent-borne (iii) Full gloss solvent-borne GALVANIZED OR ZINCALUME (i) Galvanised iron metal primer latex (ii) Gloss latex paint (iii) Gloss latex paint WOODWORK (i) Primer solvent-borne (generally applied before delivery) touch up as required (ii) Exterior undercoat solvent-borne (iii) Exterior high gloss solvent-borne (iv) Exterior high gloss solvent-borne
R.5.2
INTERIOR PAINTING
REFER FINISHES SCHEDULE FOR LOCATIONS AND PAINT TYPES Internal paint systems shall be : PLASTERBOARD, CONCRETE, RENDER (i) Pigmented sealer latex (ii) Latex paint (iii) Latex paint PROVIDE WASH AND WEAR LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC TO SUSPENDED CEILINGS AND PARTITIONS TIMBER, CRAFTWOOD AND PARTICLE BOARD SURFACES (i) Wood primer (ii) Interior undercoat solvent-borne (iii) Interior paint solvent-borne (iv) Interior paint solvent-borne Paint finish satin or gloss as directed WOODWORK, PLYWOOD, CRAFTWOOD AND VENEERED PARTICLE BOARD SURFACES (i) Lightly stain to even colour (ii) One-pack clear polyurethane (iii) One-pack clear polyurethane INTERIOR WOODWORK (i) Cabot's Interior Stain (ii) Cabot's Interior Stain (iii) Cabot's Cabothane or Danish Oil INTERIOR WOODWORK (i) Cabot's Stain Wax (ii) Cabot's Stain Wax
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 7 of 9
PAINTER INTERIOR CONCRETE, RENDER, HARD PLASTER (i) Sealer latex (ii) Paint latex (iii) Paint latex Paint finish low gloss, semi-gloss or gloss as directed INTERIOR FIBRE CEMENT (i) Sealer (ii) Paint latex (iii) Paint latex STEEL AND METALWORK (i) Metal primer (i) Paint solvent-borne (iii) Paint solvent-borne GALVANISED STEEL - GENERALLY (i) Galvanised iron metal primer (ii) Paint solvent-borne (iii) Paint solvent-borne Paint finish full or semi-gloss as directed NOTE: SOLVENT-BORNE PAINTS. In the terms of this standard, solvent- borne paints contain alkyd resins and dry to a hard finish. LATEX PAINTS. Latex paints are essentially water emulsion paints incorporating synthetic resins, such as polyvinyl acetate and acrylate.
R.5.3
PAINTING BY SUBCONTRACTORS
All exposed sprinkler pipes, thermal fire detectors, metal members of the suspension system, hot water pipes, gas pipes and mechanical ventilation ductwork and registers shall be painted by the Subcontractors installing these items.
R.6
SPECIALIZED COATINGS
R.6.1
FINISH TO INTERNAL DOORS
After preparation, apply one coat of white primer, sand paper, stop and apply blade filler to level the surface. Sand paper and apply two coats of super gloss solvent-borne paint. Rub with wet and dry sandpaper between coats. Prepare and submit a sample finish to internal doors for approval before commencement of Work.
R.7
CARPARK LINE MARKING
R.7.1
GENERALLY
The paint shall be white Taubman's alkyd type S3/3526 Road Marking paint applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Lines shall be 75 mm wide. Apply Disabled Persons symbol in accordance with AS 1428. Directional lines and disabled marking shall be as indicated on drawings or as directed on site. Apply 2 No. applications to all markings. Paint to thoroughly dry surfaces which have been swept and cleaned of all dust, soil, oil and other foreign and loose material.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 8 of 9
PAINTER
R.8
FULL GLOSS COATINGS TO METAL SURFACES
R.8.1
GENERALLY
(a)
GENERALLY
Project architectural metal handrails and balustrades where indicated shall be painted full gloss enamel. Prior to application of finish, metalwork shall be abrasive blast-cleaned, in accordance with AS 1627.4 Class 21/2. All the above coatings shall be applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shall be applied using conventional air atomising or airless spray equipment. Brush or roller application will not be permitted under any circumstances. (b) EPOXY PAINT FOR STRUCTURAL AND OTHER STEELWORK Where scheduled apply micaceous Iron Oxide Polyamine cure epoxy paint to steelwork. The paint shall be Ferrodor EPX (Fast Cure), manufactured by Dulux Protective Coatings, two component paint, applied in one coat to 300 micrometers to wet film and 250 micrometers to dry film per coat. Apply top coats in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Apply to primed surfaces, typically over organic or inorganic zinc rich primers. Remove all oil or grease contamination from the surface by solvent wiping. Dust should be removed by vacuum cleaning. Apply by roller, laying in one direction or use conventional spray or airless spray. (c)
HIGH GLOSS ENAMEL PAINT (SPRAYED)
Surfaces shall be prepared as follows: Fill nail-holes and minor imperfections with Timber Putty, sand smooth with 180-240 grade freecut paper and remove all sanding dust. If required, stain the surface using Fade-Resistant Stain, 855 Speed Stain, or 852 Aquastain. Application: Apply by conventional spray. The surfaces may be slightly sanded after a minimum two hours air-drying, or after air- drying for one hour, and stoving for 10-15 minutes at 45oC. Surfaces may be recoated, without sanding, up to 24 hours after the first application. If re-coating is necessary after this time, sand lightly with 800-1200 grade paper between coats. Pigmented top-coats shall be over-coated with a clear satin of gloss top-coat to improve colour depth and mar-and-scuff- resistance. Dust or imperfections in this film may be removed by using a very fine grade of abrasive paper. Sand marks may be removed by using 2000 grade Wet-or-Dry, lubricated with soapy water. The system may then be polished by using Re-Po Burnishing Cream, Car-Plan's T-Cut, or Safety Kleen's Finish Glaze. for brilliant final finish, use Cleanbright Liquid Ebony Polish. Prepare a prototype of the finish, where directed on site, for the approval of the Superintendent. Approved prototypes in appropriate locations may form part of the complete installation.
R.9
ENAMEL PAINT FOR JOINERY
R.9.1
GENERALLY
Surfaces shall be prepared as follows: Fill nail-holes and minor imperfections with Timber Putty, sand smooth with 180-240 grade freecut paper and remove all sanding dust. If required, stain the surface using Fade-Resistant Stain, 855 Speed Stain, or 852 Aquastain. Application: Apply by conventional spray. The surfaces may be slightly sanded after a minimum two hours air-drying, or after air- drying for one hour, and stoving for 10-15 minutes at 45oC.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 9 of 9
PAINTER Surfaces may be re-coated, without sanding, up to 24 hours after the first application. If re-coating is necessary after this time, sand lightly with 800-1200 grade paper between coats. Pigmented top-coats shall be over-coated with a clear satin of gloss top-coat to improve colour depth and mar-and-scuff- resistance. Dust or imperfections in this film may be removed by using a very fine grade of abrasive paper. Sand marks may be removed by using 2000 grade Wet-or-Dry, lubricated with soapy water. The system may then be polished by using Re-Po Burnishing Cream, Car-Plan's T-Cut, or Safety Kleen's Finish Glaze. for brilliant final finish, use Cleanbright Liquid Ebony Polish. Refer manufacturer's instructions for precautions and first aid. Prepare a prototype of the finish, where directed on site, for the approval of the Superintendent. Approved prototypes in appropriate locations may form part of the complete installation.
R.10
FINISHES TO TIMBER SURFACES
R.10.1
GENERALLY
Apply Feast and Watson, Cabot and Sikkens stains, varnishes, oils, timber-colours or clear finishes as scheduled. Before application inspect the timber and remove any defects such as surface crystals. All exterior timbers shall be treated. New timber items shall be in a clean condition and free from physical defects, such as splinters, cracks, woolly grain, machine marks, knotholes and other defects. For moisture content and other requirements refer manufacturer’s requirements. Dressed surfaces shall be lightly sanded and nail holes, cracks and other defects shall be filled with exterior grade putty in a colour to suit the timber species.. Solvent cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with AS 1627, Part 1. Refer manufacturer’s instructions for each application, number of coating and condition. Prepare, clean and sand timber and apply by brush or pad in 3 No. coats in accordance with the Specification Code.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 6
GLAZIER CONTENTS
S.
GLAZIER ............................................................................................................. 2 S.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................ 2 S.2 SCOPE ........................................................................................................ 2 S.3 DESIGN ....................................................................................................... 2 S.4 GLASS TYPE AND THICKNESS ................................................................. 2 S.5 WINDOW DESIGN ...................................................................................... 2 S.6 DESIGN WIND PRESSURE SCHEDULE.................................................... 2 S.7 CERTIFICATION ......................................................................................... 2 S.8 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS ............................................................ 3 S.9 RECOMMENDED GLAZED WINOWS ........................................................ 3 S.10 ACOUSTIC SEALING OF WINDOW FRAMES ........................................ 3 S.11 MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 3 S.12 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 3 S.13 FLOAT GLASS ......................................................................................... 4 S.14 TOUGHENED SAFETY GLASS ............................................................... 4 S.15 LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS ................................................................. 4 S.16 GLAZING COMPOUNDS ......................................................................... 4 S.17 SETTING BLOCKS AND DISTANCE PIECES ......................................... 4 S.18 GLAZING GASKETS ................................................................................ 4 S.19 GLASS SEALANTS .................................................................................. 4 S.20 WORKMANSHIP ...................................................................................... 4 S.21 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 4 S.22 FIRE RATED GLAZING SYSTEMS ......................................................... 5 S.23 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 5 S.24 MIRRORS ................................................................................................ 5 S.25 GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 5 S.26 GLAZED SHOWER SCREENS ................................................................ 5 S.27 PARTITION GLAZING.............................................................................. 5 S.28 COMPLETION OF GLAZING ................................................................... 6 CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT ......................................................................... 6
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 6
GLAZIER S.
GLAZIER
S.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
S.2
SCOPE
The work in this section includes all glass, glazing and related items necessary to complete the works. Refer also Section L – Metalworker for glass in windows and wall. Refer also for drawings for description and location of glass and mirrors. Included: Glazing work shall include, but not be limited to the following: Glass to windows; Glass to external fixed pane aluminium framed windows; Glazing to external aluminium framed and glazed doors; Aluminium framed mirrors. Refer Exterior and Interior Finishes Schedule.
S.3
DESIGN
For all windows: Allow minimum 600Pa. or For windows where the head is less than 10 metres above the ground 150 Pa
S.4
For windows where the head height is more than 10 metres above the ground 300 Pa
GLASS TYPE AND THICKNESS
Standard: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is given.
S.5
WINDOW DESIGN
In order to satisfy the requirements of the B.C.A. F1.4, the minimum design pressures as noted in the Design wind pressures schedule shall be adopted for the purposes of Clause 5.3.4 of AS 2047 - 1977 Sections 1-5.
S.6
DESIGN WIND PRESSURE SCHEDULE
For all windows: Minimum 600Pa.
S.7
CERTIFICATION
A certificate to the effect that windows to be supplied and installed in accordance with the above window design condition shall be provided to the Building Surveyor prior to any window installation. Reflectivity: The certificate shall include any reflectivity requirements that may be imposed by the local authority and the minimum pressure adopted for the window design. Wind pressure: The certificate shall also state the window is stable for that wind pressure when tested at any position of opening.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 6
GLAZIER S.8
DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS
Determine the glass thickness in accordance with the requirements of the current Code of Practice – AS 1228 – 2006 and AS 1288 Supp 1-2006 Installation of Glass in Buildings and the design wind pressure. Comply with AS 4055 – 2006 Wind Loads for Housing. Refer to HB 125 – 2007 - The glass and glazing Handbook. Safety glass shall comply to the requirements of AS 2208. Non standard thickness of safety glass shall comply to the requirements of Table 5.1 of AS 1288 – 1994. Each panel of safety glazing material shall be legibly marked in accordance with AS 2208. Refer drawings for other thickness and types of glass.
S.9
RECOMMENDED GLAZED WINOWS
Glazing systems shall be submitted to the Contractor and developer’s representative prior to installation in the building. In addition submit Laboratory test data performed in accordance with AS 1191-1985 providing evidence that the proposed window systems comply with the requirements of the brief. Only windows having laboratory test data indicating compliance with the specification STC requirements will be accepted. Note that living areas including kitchens and corridors. Moreover, thicker glazing may be required for structural, safety or other purposes. Where it is required to use thicker glazing than scheduled, this will also be acoustically acceptable.
S.10
ACOUSTIC SEALING OF WINDOW FRAMES
Where glazing is required to achieve a nominated acoustic performance the perimeter of the window frame shall be acoustically sealed into the window opening so there is no leakage of noise between the window frame and the building opening. The sealing method selected shall take into account and allow for any movement of the window frame relative to the building opening and so that the acoustic performance is maintained. One of the following two methods shall be used to seal the gap between the window and the building opening. These shall be followed even if there is internal or external cladding butting against the window frame. Method 1 A 10-15mm wide gap shall be left between the window frame and the building opening. The gap between the window frame and the building opening shall be caulked with an elastomeric sealant having a cured density of not less than 1000 kg/m3. Minimum 10mm thick caulking shall be applied near the external face of the mullion with additional 10mm thick caulking near the inner face. Provide backing rods and bond breaker tapes as specified or required by sealant manufacturer. If the gap between the mullion and the building opening exceeds 15mm the gap shall be packed with 8kg/m3 fibreglass or equal. Method 2 A 10-15mm wide gap shall be left between the window frame and the building opening. This gap shall be covered with 3mm thick aluminium angles for all 12.38mm thick (or greater) single glazing, and 1.5mm thick angles for single glazing less that 12.38mm thickness.
S.11
MATERIALS
S.12
GENERAL
Glass shall be of the best quality Australian manufacture. All glass shall be soda-lime-silica type and shall be the best quality of the kinds and grades specified. All glass shall be such quality that surface deterioration does not develop after glazing under normal conditions of use, and provided that the glass is cleaned regularly and protected . WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 4 of 6
GLAZIER All glass shall be free from cracks, scratches, bubbles, blisters and other defects which will interfere with vision, appearance or service.
S.13
FLOAT GLASS
Float glass shall be clear glass manufactured by the floating process resulting in clear, transparent glass with flat and parallel surfaces providing a clear, undistorted vision and reflection.
S.14
TOUGHENED SAFETY GLASS
Toughened safety glass shall be float glass conforming to appropriate Australian Standard relating to toughened glass for use in buildings and shall be float glass which has been processed by reheating and rapid cooling.
S.15
LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS
Laminated safety glass shall be clear float glass consisting of two thicknesses of float glass bonded together with clear polyvinyl butyl interlayer between each piece of glass.
S.16
GLAZING COMPOUNDS
Glazing compounds, either setting or non-setting, shall be of a type based on synthetic rubbers or polysulphides of an approved brand which has been specially prepared for the intended purpose. Glazing compound used adjacent to non-painted or natural finished material shall be colour matched.
S.17
SETTING BLOCKS AND DISTANCE PIECES
Setting blocks and distance pieces shall be of non-absorbent resilient material such as neoprene, rigid nylon or lead.
S.18
GLAZING GASKETS
Glazing gaskets shall be of neoprene and moulded into a continuous one-piece gasket to correct size for unit glazed.
S.19
GLASS SEALANTS
Sealant to glass shall be Silicone building sealant as distributed by Selleys or other approved firm. The sealant will be used to make flexible watertight joints between glass sheets and applied only to surfaces that are sound, clean and dry. Silicone sealant shall be one-part, ready to use material and when cured in the air it shall be resilient silicone rubber. Apply sealant with an air operated gun or hand operated cartridge gun and install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove excess sealant and clean-up.
S.20
WORKMANSHIP
S.21
GENERALLY
Glass shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the recommended practice of Federal Glass Merchants' Association of Australia by competent tradesmen and in compliance with the requirements of AS 1288 Code of Practice for Installation of Glass in Buildings. All glass shall be clean and with wheel-cut edges with minimum feather, free from vents, notches or shells and other imperfections due to nipping to size or damage due to bad handling practice. The glass shall be accurately cut to allow for proper tolerances between edges and frame and allow for thermal expansion and structural movements. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 5 of 6
GLAZIER All excess compounds shall be struck flush and neat, and work left clean. Set glass to preclude looseness and rattling.
S.22
FIRE RATED GLAZING SYSTEMS
S.23
GENERALLY
Refer Window Schedule. Provide fire rated windows where shown on drawings of Australian Fire Glass or similar approved manufacture. Windows shall comply with AS 1530.4 for testing and assessment. Windows shall have provision for automatic closing. Standard Fire rated glazing system shall be constructed with galvanised steel frame.
S.24
MIRRORS
S.25
GENERALLY
For types of mirrors refer Materials and Finishes Schedule. For fixing of special mirrors refer to manufacturer’s instructions. Mirrors generally shall be float glass silvered and protected with copper backing and an approved backing process. Sizes shall be as indicated. Fix mirrors to backgrounds using Bostick Stickpads to positions shown. Mirrors shall have flat polish and polished arise edges and shall be fixed to prepared and sealed plastered walls with Polarex or other approved mirror adhesive system. Plastered surfaces shall be fixed plumb and perfectly flat. The surface shall be inspected by the mirror installer and any defects brought to the attention of the Contractor. An installed mirror shall be deemed to be full acceptance of the plastered surface by the installer. All edges of the mirror and all joints shall be sealed with an approved brand of non-acidic silicone sealant clear in colour.
S.26
GLAZED SHOWER SCREENS
REFER INTERIOR FITTING SCHEDULE Type Proprietary system comprising frames of extruded polished aluminium, stainless steel. or PVC, or frameless, assembled around safety laminated or toughened glass to form fixed panels and sliding, hinged or pivoted doors. Hardware: Pull handles on both sides of sash, or of leading sash in multiple sash arrangements. Provide Shop/Technical drawings of hinges and other components for Designer’s approval. Water shedding Provide an assembly which sheds water to the inside without retaining it on the frame surfaces. Seal the edge of the frame to adjoining surfaces with a resilient strip.
S.27
PARTITION GLAZING
General Assembly: Provide beads or snap-in beads and resilient (PVC, butyl or similar) glazing tapes, gaskets and inserts, so that the glass is held firmly without distortion and withstands the specified loadings. Frameless installations Join the vertical edges of adjacent glass panels with a silicone jointing compound. Confirm colour of silicone jointing compound with the Superintendent prior to ordering.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 6 of 6
GLAZIER S.28
COMPLETION OF GLAZING
CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT Immediately before Practical Completion, clean and polish all glass, replace any damaged or broken glass, and leave the whole of the work on good condition. During the progress of the Works, keep the glass clean by prompt removal of foreign matter, particularly cement products. Glass cleaning agent shall be clean water with or without detergents added to the water in small quantities or any approved glass cleaning agent.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 3
SEALANTS AND CAULKING CONTENTS
X.
SEALANTS AND CAULKING FOR WATERPROOFING AND FIRE JOINTS .... 2 X.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................ 2 X.2 MATERIALS................................................................................................. 3 X.3 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 3 X.4 SEALANT JOINTING ................................................................................... 3 X.5 PIPES AND DUCTS .................................................................................... 3 X.6 FIRE RESISTANT SEALING TO MASONRY .............................................. 3 X.7 SEALING BETWEEN WALLS AND SANITARY FIXTURES........................ 3
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 3
SEALANTS AND CAULKING
X.
SEALANTS AND CAULKING FOR WATERPROOFING AND FIRE JOINTS
X.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The work of this Section includes sealing and caulking work to be done for waterproofing and fire jointing to masonry and concrete. Comply with the following Standards: ASTM C920 FGMA AS 1530 AS 4072 AS 1526
Standard specification for elastomeric joint sealants Sealant manual Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistance separating elements – Service penetrations and control joints Window Sealants
Sealants shall be compatible with non-staining, non-contaminating and non-harmful to substrates and adjacent materials. Visible sealants shall be resistant to ultra-violet light, and atmospheric and environmental pollution. Submit test results to verify compatibility and durability. Movement capability of joint sealants shall accommodate the expected maximum movement and deflection of the joint. Sealant for each joint type shall be the same product and manufacturer: Visible: To match adjacent colours unless otherwise indicated. The Contractor shall examine all drawings and details by all trades whose work requires waterproofing with sealants and application of sealants for fire resistant sealing of control joints in masonry walls and floors. All work shall comply with Building Code of Australia. The work under this heading shall be done by the Manufacturer of Sealant or Caulking material or by a specialist Contractor approved by the Manufacturer. Supply and install sealants and caulking of joints as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including backup fillers where required and including but not necessarily limited to the following:
Exterior perimeter to all doors, windows and other openings;
Pipes penetrating roofs, floors or ceilings
Junctions of fitments to walls
Seal all penetration against fire, smoke, fumes, dust and water.
Seal gaps and joints in building.
All other joints as may be required or shown on the drawings.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
Page 3 of 3
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
SEALANTS AND CAULKING X.2
MATERIALS
COMPANY
TELEPHONE No
Parchem Construction Products Sheet and liquid membranes, cementitious waterproofing Promaseal ( Fire rated Sealant) by Promat International Sikaflex PRO 2HP Façade joints, around windows and doors Chemdet Pty Ltd Fyrethan of Tremco Pty Ltd
1800 624 322
X.3
1800 302 020 02 2972 1145 9551 1222 9846 3131
INSTALLATION
Use power driven equipment where ever possible to install compounds so as to ensure uniformity of application and the highest quality of workmanship. Use nozzle gun of proper dimension to suit size of crevice . Use sufficient force to fill joint solidly, forcing out all air. All surfaces shall be wiped clean with a solvent to assure proper bond. Colour of sealants and caulking shall be as selected.
X.4
SEALANT JOINTING
Immediately before jointing remove loose particles from the joint, using oil-free compressed air. Protect the surface on each side of the joint using 50 mm wide masking tape. On completion of pointing remove the tape and remove any stains or marks from the surface. Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished materials. Apply recommended primer, foamed materials and bond breaking as applicable.
X.5
PIPES AND DUCTS
All wall and ceiling penetrations where required for Fire proofing penetrations of pipes and ducts for Mechanical and other services shall be constructed with joints sealed with Thioflex 600 Gun Grade two part polysulphide sealant, manufactured by Expandite (Australia) Pty Ltd . Joint preparation and sealant mixing and application must be carried out in conjunction with Triton Kaowool and in strict accordance with the Building Code of Australia and manufacturer's instructions.
X.6
FIRE RESISTANT SEALING TO MASONRY
Fire resistant sealing where required for sealing of control joints in walls shall be Rocor Fyrejoint manufactured by Chemdet Pty Ltd, or Fyrethane of Tremco manufacture. Use back up rod and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
X.7
SEALING BETWEEN WALLS AND SANITARY FIXTURES
Apply Silicone 66, manufactured by Expandite, a one part, non slump, non-acid cure silicone sealant.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 1 of 3
CLEANING CONTENTS
YY. CLEANING ..................................................................................................... 2 YY.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................... 2 YY.1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS ............................................................................ 2 YY.1.2 CLEANING ........................................................................................... 2 YY.1.3 CLEANING OF THE FACADE ............................................................. 3 YY.1.4 INSPECTION OF THE WORKS........................................................... 3
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 2 of 3
CLEANING
YY.
CLEANING
YY.1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
YY.1.1
SCOPE OF WORKS
During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to avoid the spread of dust, dirt and debris about the site of the Work and to adjacent properties. Special care shall be taken to avoid the uncontrolled spreading of water, plaster, paint, cement, dust. etc. During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall require that each Sub-Contractor on the Work make every effort to keep his work clean and free of debris at all times. It will be mandatory that splattering of fresh plaster, concrete and paint be cleaned at the time they occur. An adequate means of controlling the spread of sandpaper dust and the like shall also be provided. Each individual Sub- Contractor and Applicator will be held responsible for damage to other portions of the work which may result from their work. Just prior to Practical Completion, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all inside and outside of the structure, including all fixtures, equipment, walls, ceilings, floors and hardware. This shall include thorough cleaning of roofs, window and opening ledges and sills, horizontal projections, exterior steps and platforms, rails and other surfaces. Dust, dirt, stains, handmark, paint spots, plaster droppings, and similar defects shall be completely removed. YY.1.2
CLEANING
Besides general cleaning, do the following special cleaning at completion of work: 1. Remove putty stains and labels from glass; wash and polish inside and outside and left free of dirt, marks, labels and spots. Scratched glass to be removed and replaced. 2. Remove marks, stains, fingerprints, other soil and dirt from painted, decorated or stained work. 3. Clean finished woodwork. 4. Clean and polish hardware for all trades. This shall include removal of stains, dust, dirt, paint and the like. 5. Remove spots, soil and paint from the tile and similar applied finishes, wash and polish as appropriate. 6. Clean fixtures and equipment; remove stains, paint, dirt and dust. 7. Plumbing fixtures and like items shall be cleaned and polished. Lighting fixtures shall be free of dust, dirt, stains, or waste material. 8. Equipment and machinery shall be cleaned, serviced, and left ready for use. 9. Remove temporary floor protection; clean and polish floors. Clean exterior and interior metal surfaces, including doors and windows required to have polished finish, of oil, stains, dust, dirt, paint and the like; polish, leave without fingermarks or other blemishes. 9. Wipe surface of mechanical and electrical equipment clean. 10.Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces. 11.Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
38 AROONA ROAD CAULFIELD NORTH
Page 3 of 3
CLEANING 12.Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary and polished condition free of stains including those resulting from water exposure. 13.Clean project site, including planted sections and footpaths of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom clean condition. YY.1.3
CLEANING OF THE FACADE
During the course of the Works, inspect regularly and keep thoroughly clean the external face of the installed facade as required, including but not limited to: 1. Prevention of overflow from unfinished floors overhead of dust (including alkaline material likely to etch the glass) and construction debris, collections within the junctions and drainage of the facade system. 2. Cleaning of all exposed surfaces to leave the facade free from dirt, adhesive and sealant residue, debris and discolouration. 3. Inspection for damage and/or defects of all exposed surfaces including anodised aluminium , glass, gaskets and sealants. 4. Making good, replacement or repair to the approval of the Superintendent. Monitor the facade to ensure that any cementations spill (concrete, grouting, compound, etc.) or any other spill of a deleterious nature is detected immediately it occurs, and is removed at the earliest possible time, and in particularly within any critical period established by the glass, coating or component manufacturers in order to ensure that product warranties and/or guarantees are not voided. YY.1.4
INSPECTION OF THE WORKS
The Superintendent shall be informed at completion of the clean-up and an inspection of the premises will be made to determine the competency of the clean-up as determined by the Superintendent. Areas requiring further clean-up shall be immediately corrected and re-inspected prior to final acceptance of the work.
WEBER ARCHITECTS PTY LTD
